以下是小编帮大家整理的人教版高三英语Unit 14 Zoology教案及ab卷(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)，本文共14篇，仅供参考，希望能够帮助到大家。本文原稿由网友“璇璇lღl”提供。
篇1：人教版高三英语Unit 14 Zoology教案及ab卷(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
整体感知
单元要点
Word study 1. bee 2.transparent 3.dot
4.surrounding 5.troop 6.assumption 7.beyond 8.semicicle 9.apparent 10.sideways11.astonishing
12.maximum13.precise 14.adequate 15.clarify16.upward 17.disgusting
18.psychology19.changeable 20.adaptation 21.stripe
22.zebra 23.camel
24.primitive
25.missile 26.walnut
27.session 1. 蜜蜂2.透明的
3.小圆点4.周围附近的 5.群，(pl)部队6.假设
7.远于，超出8.半圆形
9.明显的10.斜着
11.惊人的12.最大13.精确
14.足够的15.澄清16.向上的17.讨厌的18.心理学
19.易变20.适应21.条纹
22.斑马23.骆驼24.原始的
25.导弹26.胡桃
27.一段时间，学年
Useful
expressions 1.get hold of
2.tell…apart
3.over and over again
4.come to light
5.as a matter of 1.抓住
2.分辨，区别
3.一再，反复
4.显露，为人所知
5.事实上，说真的
Sentence
Patterns &
Communicative
English Debating (辩论)
1. Opening statement
Background information
Topic
Opinion: We think that…because…and…
2. First argument
Explain and support the first reason
3. Sencond argument
Explain and support the second reason
4. Questions
Ask the other team questions
5. Closing statement
Summarize your argument
Restate your opinion
Grammer 复习情态动词表推测的用法：(must can could may might)
1. When you are very sure of something, you use must in positive sentences and cannot or couldn’t in negative sentences.
2. When you are quite sure about something, you use can.
3. When you think that something is possible, but you are not very sure, you use could, may or might.
Topics &
Writing 1. Talk about prepare for tests:
①.Plan ahead ②.Keep track
③.Be smart ④.Use your brain power
2.Writing a short essay in which you state and support your opinion.
背景知识
Do Animals Communicate?
When we think of communication, we normally think of using words-talking face-to-face, writing messages and so on. But in fact we communicate far more in other ways. Our eyes and facial expressions usually tell the truth even when our words do not. Then there are gestures, often unconscious: raising the eyebrows, rubbing the nose, shrugging the shoulders, tapping the fingers, nodding and shaking the head.
There is also the even more subtle “body-language” language “of posture: are you sitting-or standing-with arms or legs crossed? Is that person standing with hands in pockets, held in front of the body or hidden behind? Even the way we dress and the colures we wear communicate things to others. So, do animals communicate? Not in words, although a parrot might be trained to repeat words and phrases which it doesn’t understand. But, as we have learnt, there is more to communication than words.
Take dogs for example. They bare their teeth to warn, wag their tails to welcome and stand firm, with hair erect, to challenge. These signals are surely the equivalent of the human body language of facial expression, gesture and posture.
Colour can be an important means of communication for animals. Many birds and fish change colour, for example, to attract partners during the mating season. And mating itself is commonly preceded by a special dance in which both partners participate.
细说教材
Warming up
A small animal that helps the police get hold of thieves.
一种能帮助警察捉贼的动物。
【点拨】get hold of …= take/catch hold of …意思是“抓住…”；“获得…”
e.g. He took hold of the rope and pulled.
他抓住绳子用力拉。
I got hold of the sack and lifted it.
我抓住包，把它举了起来。
I need to get hold of some money quickly.
hold 还用作动词，意为“握住”“拥有”“容纳”“使…保持…”“持…观点”等
e.g. She was holding a book. 她手里拿着一本书。
They held their heads up.他们头抬得高高的。
She holds that the government’s policy is mistaken.
她认为政府的政策错了。
其常见短语搭配有：
hold a conversation/meeting 进行交谈/开会
hold the line = hold on 别挂电话
hold … back 阻止…
hold one’s breath 屏住呼吸
hold…off 使…与…保持距离
hold …over 使…延期
An animal that isn’t telling the truth.
一种会撒谎的动物。
【点拨】tell the truth“说实话”的意思，tell的相关类似短语有：
tell a/the lie = tell lies 撒谎
tell a story 讲故事
Listening
You are going to hear an interview with a woman who works in a zoo.
你将听到对一位在动物园工作的妇女的采访报道。
【点拨】interview 在这里是名词“采访”的意思，还有“面试”之意。
e.g. The film star agreed to give an interview after the wedding.
这位影星同意在婚礼后接受采访。
She’s got an interview for a new job.
她参加了新工作的面试。
interview 还有动词用法，是“采访”的意思,
要区别与cover的用法。interview 可以用interview sb. 或interview sth.
但cover不能用cover sb.只能说cover sth.
e.g. A reporter interviewed the prime minister.
一位记者采访了首相。
She’s being interviewed for the job.
她正在接受求职面试。
They sent a great many reporters to cover the conference.
【点拨】cover除了“采访”的意思外还有“用……遮盖；覆盖”“占有…（面积）;掩饰”
“涉及…（内容）”等含义。请学习下面例句中cover 一词的各种用法
e.g. Since water covers most of the earth, Corsteau knew we should keep the seas clean.
由于水覆盖了地球的大部分，库斯托知道我们应该保持海洋清洁。
He tried to cover (up)his mistake.
他想掩盖他的错误。
He said he could cover the distance on foot in two hours.
他说这段路程两个小时能走完
How many pages have you covered? 你读了多少页了？
What are the main points you’re going to cover in your talk ?
你的报告主要涉及哪些内容。
We have only just covered our expenses.
我们所收入的仅够开支而已。
cover作名词，作“盖子”、“封面”解。
e.g. When the water boils, take the cover.
当水开的时候,把盖子揭开.
The book needs a new cover .
这书需要装个新封面.
What’s the problem with the animals at the zoo?
动物园里的动物有什么问题？
【点拨】What’s the problem with…
=What’s the trouble with…
=What’s the matter with…
=What's your problem?
=What's wrong with you?
都用来询问“…（你）怎么回事？”
Speaking
The two teams take turns speaking.
两只队伍轮流发言。
【点拨】 take turns doing sth. “轮流干…”，turn是名词。
为便于学习,现就turn的用法归纳如下:
I. turn (n.) 顺序, 轮流
1. It's one's turn to do sth. 轮到某人做某事
It's your turn to make a decision.
该你来做出决定了。
2. take one's turn to do sth. = do sth. in turn =do sth. by turns 轮流做某事
The nurses attended the patient in turn / by turns.
=The nurses took turns to attend the patient.
护士们轮流照顾病人。
II. turn (vi.) 转动,转向,翻转
turn right / left = turn to the right / left
turn to sth. / sb. (for help)
turn to page 84
III. turn (link-v.) 变得……
turn green / yellow 变绿/黄了
Ten years later， he turned teacher.
A. / B. a C. an D. the
注: 此题考查turn 作连系动词的特殊用法,即 turn 作连系动词时后接表语名词，省略冠词. 所以此题的答案为A. 如果turn 后加into 则须在名词前加冠词a.
IV. 固定词组:
1. turn against 背叛
Nobody will turn against his country.
2. turn down 关小 / 拒绝
He turned down my suggestion without hesitation.
Please turn down the gas.
3. turn from side to side 把身体转来转去
The naughty boy turned from side to side while answering questions in class.
4. turn in 上交
The child picked up a purse on the way and turned it in to the policeman.
5. turn ... into ... (使……)成为……
The farmers are turning waste land into rice fields.
6. turn off 关(水源、煤气、电灯等) / 避开(问题等)
Turn off the light when you leave the room.
7. turn on 打开(水、煤气、电灯、无线电等) / 对……发怒
turn on the radio
turn the gun on sb.
8. turn out 结果是 / 证明是 / 生产出
The weather yesterday turned out (to be) fine.
The factory turned out more products than they had expected.
9. turn over (使)打翻 / 翻身 / 翻动 / 翻耕(土地) / 转危为安
The man turned over and went to sleep again when the telephone rang.
10. turn up 开大 / 出现 / 找到 / 证明是 (= turn out to be)
The meeting is beginning， but he has not turned up. He might have been lost.
When all the teams are ready, the teacher will start and time the debate.
当所有队伍都准备好以后,老师就开始为辩论计时.
【点拨】time 是动词，＂计时＂的意思，还有“安排好时间,使合拍子;安排……的速度＂
e.g. How long can you hold your breath underwater ? Take a deep breath and I’ll time you .
你在水下能潜多久呢？深呼吸一下，我给你计时。
He timed his journey so that he could arrive at the hotel before dark .
他安排好了他的旅程，以便能在天黑以前到达旅馆。
He tried to time his steps to the music.
他尽力与音乐合节拍。
Reading
Among the different types of bee, it is the honey bee that has most interested scientists because of the “language” they use to communicate with each other.
在不同种类的蜂中，最使科学家感兴趣的是蜜蜂，因为蜜蜂能用“语言”，来相互交际。
【点拨】…it is the honey bee that has most interested scientists…是一个由it 引导的强调句，被强调的部分是 the honey bee。如果不加以强调，则全句是：
…the honey bee has most interested scientists…
The development of the modern beehive in 1851 made it possible to design experiments to research the language of honey bees.
1851年新式蜂箱的研制，使设计实验研究蜜蜂的语言成为可能。
【点拨】 本句是一个简单句：The development… made it possible to design experiments …其中的 it是形式宾语，它所代替的真正宾语是后面的不定式短语 to design experiments。it作形式宾语的句型是：
主语 +及物动词 +it +宾语补足语 +不定式
e.g. I found it important to learn spoken English.
我发现学习英语口语很重要。
I think it hard to master a foreign language.
我认为掌握一门外语是很难的。
She feels it her duty to support her family.
她感到养家糊口是她的责任。
The storm made it impossible for them to march to the city.
暴风雨使他们不可能向城市进军。
Professor Karl von Frisch, a scientist from Austria, spent many years of his life researching the amazing ways honey-bees communicate in their dark hives.
奥地利科学家卡尔冯弗里希教授，一生中花去了许多岁月，研究蜜蜂在黑暗的蜂箱里是以怎样巧妙的方式传递信息的。
【点拨】amaze vt. 使惊愕；使大为惊讶：
e.g. He amazed everyone by passing his driving test.
令人惊讶的是他竟通过了驾驶考试。
amazing “令人惊异的”；在西方人的口中，表示惊讶，经常可以听到amazing这个词。如果有些事情发生得出乎意料，难以置信，也可以用amazing来形容。
e.g. You’re amazing. 你真了不起。
It was amazing that the boy was able to solve the problem so quickly.
那男孩能这样快地解完这道题,真是令人惊奇。
有些漂亮或另类的东西，总能吸引许多眼球，就可以说是amazing things.
e.g. I am always looking for new and amazing items.
我总是在寻找让我眼前一亮的新东西。
amazed 使（某人）感到惊奇，常用be amazed at / by 感到惊奇。
e.g. He was amazed at all the colours, and all the beautiful fish.
他对五颜绿色和各种美丽的鱼感到惊奇。
We are amazed at the changes in Beijing. I can’t even find where my old house is.
北京的变化使我们感到惊奇。我几乎找不到旧房子了。
【点拨】＂．．．honey-bees communicate in their dark hives.＂是定语从句，其先行词
是＂ways＂，＂way＂后省略了引导词 “that”,也可用 “in which”，也可以省略引导词．
e.g. Some English words are not spelt the ways that they sound.
= Some English words are not spelt the ways in which they sound.
= Some English words are not spelt the ways they sound.
一些英语单词不是像他们发音那样去拼写．
He built a transparent wall, through which he could observe what went on inside.
他安装了透明的箱体，透过它，可以直接观察箱内发生的事情．
【点拨】 “through which he could observe what went on inside”是定语从句，来修饰先行词，引导词是介词through加which构成．
在定语从句用法中介词+关系词是一个重点，介词后面的关系词不能省略，但是介词的后面不用that．
e.g.This is the house in which I lived two years ago.
某些在从句中充当时间，地点或原因状语的“介词+关系词”结构可以同关系副词when 和where 互换。
e.g. Do you remember the day on which you joined our club?
＝Do you remember the day when you joined our club?
注意：一些含有介词的动词短语中，其介词不能前置到引导词前．
e.g. The children whom the nurses look after are wery healthy.
In order to tell the bees apart ,he painted some bees with little dots of colour.
为了把蜜蜂区分开，他在一些蜜蜂身上涂上色斑．
【点拨】 tell apart 辨别；识别
＝distinguish…between…
= tell … from…;
= tell the difference between … and …
e.g. Some people can't tell blue from green.
在些人分辨不出蓝色与绿色。
Most new cars look so similar that it's impossible to tell them apart．
许多新汽车看上去象是一样的，不大可能把它们区别开来。
I confused Jim with Mike because I can't tell them apart．
我把吉姆和麦克混淆了，因为我分不清他们。
The two brothers are so much alike that their mother can hardly tell them apart．
这兄弟俩长得太相象了，连他们的母亲都难以辨别。
They trooped behind the first dancer, copying its movement.
它们成群结队地跟在第一只跳舞的蜜蜂后面，模仿它的动作。
【点拨】课文中 troop作动词用，意思是“结队而行”、“成群涌向”
(come or go together in a group)。用在句中时，句子的主语总是复数。
e.g. The children trooped into the park.
孩子们列队走进公园。
The game was over and the players trooped home.
比赛结束了，运动员整队回家。
Troop还有名词用法，作“一队”、“一群”解。
e.g. a troop of visitors (一群参观者)。
它的复数形式(troops)作“军队”解。
e.g. We must have our own troops.
我们必须有自己的军队。
【点拨】copy原作“抄写”、“复写”解。
e.g. He is busy copying his composition.
他正忙着抄写他的作文。
本句中的copy引伸作“模仿”、“仿效”解。
e.g. Please copy my actions.(＝Please act as I do. )
请照我这样做。
“Good morning,” she said, copying her mother's voice.
“早上好”，她模仿着妈妈的声音说。
You should copy his strong points, not his weak points.
你应当学他的长处，而不是他的短处。
Von Frisch assumed that the dance conveyed more information.
冯弗里希想弄清这种舞蹈能不能说明喂食处有多远.
【点拨】 assume的用法
assume vt. 表示“假设，主观认为，假定；装出…样子；开始担任，承担…
e.g. We assumed that you understood the situation.
我们认为，你了解形势。
He assumed a well-informed manner but in fact he knows very little.
他装出一副见多识广的样子，而实际上他知之甚少。
assume something to be 猜想某事如何
assume ignorance/an injured air
假装不知道，装出冤屈的样子
assume和given,suppose,supposing等词一样都可以引导状语.作用相当于if.
e.g. Supposing your father saw you know , what would you say?
=if your father saw ……
Assuming that the weather is favourable, Farmers will have a bumper harvest.
假如风调雨顺，今年农民将获丰收。
assumed 假装的，假的；假定的，设想的：
e.g. an assumed cheerfulness伪装的高兴，
an assumed result假定的结果，
His look of astonishment was assumed.他那惊讶的样子是装出来的。
assuming自负的，傲慢的，过分自信的：
e.g. He is too assuming in this attitude about the energy supply.
他在对待能源问题的态度上实在显得过于自信。
assumption假定，异端；自负，傲慢；假装
e.g. We are going on the assumption that the work will be finished tomorrow.
我们在根据明天可以完工这一假定办事。
I was under the assumption that you were coming tomorrow.
我原以为你明天来。
assumptive 被视为理所当然的，自负的，傲慢的：
e.g. assumptive beliefs被视为理所当然的种种信仰，
assumptive people自命不凡的人
One was close to the hive. The other was much farther away ,beyond some trees.
一个靠近蜂箱,另一个远离蜂箱,几棵大树之外.
【点拨】beyond一词是高中英语的必备词汇，其用法和含义较为复杂，很容易产生理解上的障碍，造成翻译上的失误。本文拟对beyond的一些用法浅析如下：
一、beyond作介词用时，使用最广，常用于下列几种情况：
1.表示位置，意思是“在……的那一边；在……之外；在更远处”。例如：
e.g. Beyond the river stood a power station．
过了这条河就是一个发电站。
2.表示时间，其意为“迟于；超过”。例如：
e.g. Some shops keep open beyond midnight庇行┥痰暧业到半夜以后。
3.表范围、水平、限度、能力等，意思是“超出；多于；为……所不能及”在句中常作
①作表语
e.g. Your work is beyond all praise．
你的作品叫人赞扬不尽。
②作定语
e.g. These were matters beyond his understanding as yet．
这些事情他那时候还不了解。
③作状语
e.g. We succeeded beyond our hopes．
我们获得如此之成功，是我们始料所不及的。
4.用在否定和疑问句中，意思是“除……之外”。
e.g. I know nothing beyond what he told me．
除了他告诉我的以外，别的我都不知道。
Is there anything more you can say beyond that？
除了那点之外，你还能说些什么吗？
5.beyond有时还可表示年龄或数量，意思是“超过”。
e.g. He didn't believe in people living beyond 100．
他不相信人能活到100岁以上。
二、beyond也常作副词用，主要有下面两种用法：
1.指时空或正在进行中的活动，意思是“在远处；向远处；更远处”。
e.g. If we cross the mountains we may find people living in the valley beyond．
如果我们翻过这些大山，我们就可以发现在远处山谷中生活的人们。
I'll go with you to the bridge，but not a step beyond．
我愿意同你一道走到桥头，但再远的地方一步也不愿意去。
2.表示外加，意思是“此外；以外”。例如：
e.g. He told me nothing beyond．
此外他没告诉我什么。
He marked all the bees that came to the nearby feeding place blue, and all the bees that went to the faraway place were marked red.
他给所有来到近的喂食处的蜜蜂标上蓝色，给飞到远的喂食处的蜜蜂标上红色。
【点拨】faraway(远方的)是由 far ＋ away构成的合成形容词。 nearby(附近的)是由 near ＋by构成的合成形容词。它们在句中都作定语。
a faraway forest(远处的森林)，faraway times(遥远的时代)；
a nearby hotel(附近的一家旅店)，nearby hills(附近的小山)。
注意：faraway在作定语时通常都连写，作表语或作状语时则分写(far away)。如：
e.g. The house is not far away. 那座房子并不远。
He lives far away from the school. 他住得离学校很远。
nearby既可作定语，又可作状语；既可以连写(nearby)，也可以分写(near by)，还可以 加连字符(near-by)。
e.g. I saw her going to a near-by post-box before lunch.
我看到她午饭前去附近的信箱投信。
They live nearby----less than a kilometer.
他们住在附近，不到一公里。
He gave up his seat to the old man standing near by.
他把座位让给站在附近的老人了。
They discovered that the farther away the feeding station was, the slower the dance was. 他们发现，喂食处越远，舞蹈动作的速度就越慢。
【点拨】“the+比较级……，the+ 比较级……”的意思是：“越……，就越……”
这种结构用来表示两从此过程按比例同时递增。前一句为从句，后一句为主句。
这种结构常以省略形式出现，句式精炼简短，表意有力。例如：
e.g. The sooner, the better. 越快越好。
The more, the better. 越多越好。
The more, the merrier. 人越多，越好玩。
The more he gives his children, the more they want.
给孩子越多，他们要的越多．
The higher we stand, the farther we see.
站的越高，看的越远
The more he explains, the more I am puzzled.
他越解释，我越迷惑．
So another astonishing fact came to light. 于是又发现一个令人惊讶的情况。
【点拨】come to light作“发现”、“暴露”(to be discovered/ exposed)解。
e.g. New facts about the ancient Egypt have recently come to light.
有关古埃及的史实，最近已有新发现。
She was very pleased when the long-lost ring came to light.
当很久前丢失的戒指被找到时，她高兴万分．
The secret didn’t come to light until the old man died.
直到老人死后，秘密才被揭露．
Integrating skills
Apes use sight more than smell. 猿不仅用嗅觉,而且使用视觉.
【点拨】more than 用法小结
1. more than后面跟名词，意为“不只是，不仅仅是”。
e.g. Hibernation is more than sleep.
冬眠不只是睡觉。
Kate was more than a teacher. She also did what she could to take care of her pupils.
凯特不仅仅是位教师，她还尽其所能照顾她的学生。
2. more than与数词连用，意思是“多于，大于，超过”。
e.g. I have known him for more than twenty years.
我认识他已超过二十年了。
More than ten policemen turned up at the spot where the accident happened.
十多位警察出现在出事地点。
3. more than与形容词和分词连用，表示“非常、十分”。
e.g. They were more than happy to see us come back from the expedition.
看到我们远征而归，他们异常高兴。
I was more than surprised to see the lion standing at the body.
看到那头狮子站在尸体旁边，我非常惊讶。
4. more than与动词连用，对动词起着加强语气的作用。
e.g. Repeated advertising will more than increase product sales.
多次做广告意味着增加产品的销售。
His progress in English learning more than encouraged him to learn the subject well. 在英语学习方面的进步激励他学好这门课程。
5. more than和含有情态动词的句子连用，有否定意义，表示“是……难以……”或“超过了……所能”之义。
e.g. The beauty of the mountainous country is more than I can describe.
我难以描述那个山村的美丽。
This problem is more than a child like Jack can settle.
这一问题超出了像杰克这样的小孩的解决能力。
6. no more than意思是“仅仅，不过，只是”。
e.g. All his education added up to no more than one year.
他接受的所有的学校教育只有一年。
Their new flat has no more than 60 square metres.
他们的新居只有60平方米。
7. not more than表示“至多，不超过”
e.g. Lying on the ground was a peasant boy of not more than seventeen.
躺在地上的那个农家男孩最多十七岁。
While their societies are different, they all communicate and be have in advanced ways.
虽然它们生活的社会环境不同,它们却都以高级方式交流.
【点拨】while连词,意为“尽管;虽然”;其用法大致有以下四种用法:
1.引导时间状语从句,意为“当……的时候;和……同时”,此时的主从句谓语动作同时发生,从句谓语通常是延续性动词。
e.g. Mary watched TV while she ate her supper.
玛丽边吃饭边看电视。
While she was listening to the radio, she fell asleep.
她听着收音机睡着了。
while引导从句时,如主从句的主语一致,且从句谓语又含有be,则从句主语和be可省略。while后可直接跟现在分词、名词、形容词或介词短语。
e.g. We are teachers while (we are) serving as students.
我们边当老师边当学生。
While (he was) yet a youth, he gained many prizes.
他年轻时就曾多次获奖。
He caught a cold while(he was) on vacation.
他度假时患了感冒。
2.表示对比或转折,意为“而;然而”。此时,while一般位于句中。
e.g. Some people waste food while others haven't enough.
有些人浪费粮食,然而有些人却吃不饱。
You like sports, while I prefer music.
你喜欢体育,而我更喜欢音乐。
3.表示让步,通常位于句首,意为“尽管;虽然”。
e.g. While I agree with your reasons, I can't allow it.
尽管我同意你的理由,但我不能允许这样做。
While he loves his students, he is very strict with them.
虽然他爱他的学生,可是他对学生们很严格。
While (he was) respected, he is not liked.
他虽受人尊敬,但并不被人喜欢。
4.表示条件,意为“只要”,其意思和用法相当于as long as。while可位于句首,也可位于句中。
e.g. You don't have to worry while we are here.
只要我们在,你就别着急。
There will be life while there is water and air.
只要有空气和水,就有生命。
While there is life, there is hope.
留得生命在,不怕没希望。
5.意为“同时;也”。如:
e.g. While the book is welcomed by scholars, it will make an immediate
appeal to the general readers.
这本书受到学者的欢迎,同时也会引起一般读者的兴趣。
6.意为“趁着”。
e.g. Make hay while the sun shines.
晒草要趁阳光好。(谚)
Strike while the iron is hot.
趁热打铁。(谚)
While the roses are yet in bloom, will you come with me to see them?
趁着玫瑰花还开着,你和我一道去看看好吗?
Sometimes they warn each other of danger, and they also communicate simply to keep in touch.
于是它们互相提醒危险,它们交流仅仅是为了保持联系.
【点拨】 warn sb. of sth．“警告某人某事”，不能说 warn sb's sth．。
e.g. We warned him of the dangerous bridge，but he didn't believe．
我们警告他那座桥危险，但是他不相信。
类似这样的结构用法的动词还有:
一. 表示“通知(inform)；警告(warn)；指责(accuse)；使想起(remind)”等意思的一些动词。
在这一结构中，of的意思相当于 about。
e.g. On the way home my father told me of an accident that took place on his first day at school in Mr. Crossett's class．
在回家的路上,父亲给我讲了他第一天上学时在克罗塞特先生课上的一件事。
We shall inform you of the date of the delegation's arrival．
我们将把代表团到达的日期通知你。
The teacher accused Jim of cheating in the examination．
老师责备吉姆考试作弊。
Her face reminded me of her mother．
她的模样使我想起了她的母亲。
How can I persuade him of her innocence？
我怎样使他相信她是清白无辜的？
二、表示“抢夺(rob)；剥夺；解除(cure, heal)；免除(rid)”等意思的动词。
e.g. Paralysis robbed him of his ability to do physical labor．
瘫痪使他丧失了劳动力。
The doctor used special medicines to cure him of the measles．
医生使用特效药治愈了他的麻疹。
The medicine healed me of my bad cold．
这药治愈了我的重感冒。
It is not easy to rid oneself of a bad habit．
改掉一个人的坏习惯是不容易的。
He cleared the pavement of withered leaves．
他清除了人行道上的落叶。
They stripped the writer of his right to publish his books．
他们剥夺了这位作家出版作品的权利。
She rushed up to relieve me of my suitcase．
她跑过来接过我手中的衣箱。
Our army disarmed the enemy of his weapon．
我军缴械了敌人的武器。
类似的动词还有：abridge（剥夺）， purge（洗清），disabuse（去掉），despoil（抢劫），divert（脱去），deprive（剥夺）等。
三、表示“骗取(fool)”、“诈骗(cheat)”等意思的一些动词。
在这一结构里，通常在of前加上 out，out of表示“丧失”，但out可以省略不用。
e.g. How can you fool the little girl（out） of her money？
你怎么能诈骗那个小女孩的钱财呢？
The beggar cheated the little boy（out）of his candy．
那乞丐骗取了那个小男孩的糖。
【点拨】 simply的意思和用法
（1）simply是副词，在对话中意为“really(真正)”、“very (much)（非常）”。
e.g. The film is simply wonderful. 这影片真是太美妙了。
She looks simply lovely. 她看起来的确可爱。
His pronunciation is simply terrible. 他的发音简直差透了。
They had simply no shame. 他们简直不知羞耻。
（2）simply亦可解释为“朴素地”、“朴实地”、“无装饰地”。
e.g. He is simply dressed. 他衣着朴素。
（3）simply还可作“仅仅，只不过”解，相当于only。
e.g. It is simply a question of time. 这只不过是个时间问题。
You must believe me simply on my word. 你必须完全照我的话相信我。
It is simply a matter of working hard. 此事只是努力去做的问题。
（4）还可解释为“简单地”、“简明地”。
e.g. The cake is made quite simply. 这糕做起来很简单。
The teacher explained the text quite simply. 老师简单地解释了一下课文。
What may be of greater importance is to observe how primates live in the world.
比较重要的事情是观察灵长目动物是怎样生活的．
【点拨】这个句子涉及到 “of+抽象名词”相当于该名词相应的形容词。不过，这种结构常用于较正式的场合，书面语中尤为常见。再看下面几个句子：
e.g. This book will be of great value to him in his students. (=Be very valuable)
The book is of much interest. (=Be very interesting)
常用于这一结构的修饰语还有：great，little ,some ,any, no, not, much等
常见的抽象名词有importance, value, use, help, benefit(利益、好处)，significance(意义、重要性)。最后需要提及的是，“be of + 名词”结构的否定形式一般采用否定名词的做法：
“be of no + 名词”。
e.g. He is of no colour, for he has been ill for two weeks.
他毫无血色，因为他患疾两周了。
As far as the study of English was concerned, what he said was of no point.
就学习英语而言，他所讲的并未切中要害。
“be of +名词”还可以表达以下几种意义：
1、表示“具有，具备”
e.g. Her story is of some colours of the truth.
她的故事有点真实感
The party's 12th congress is of epoch making significance.
党的十二大具有划时代的意义。
2、表示“属于”
e.g. The products are of first-rate quality.
这些产品的质量是属于第一流的。
3、表示“包含”、“包括”、“类别”等
e.g. The Americans are of almost all colures and races.
美国人几乎包括各种各样的肤色及种族。
His whole life was of best glory.她的一生是非常光荣的。
4. 这种结构还可表示“年龄”.“出身”“等级”等
We are of the same age. 我们年龄相同。
He was of noble birth and high rank. 他出身于高贵门庭。
Grammar
情态动词表推测
一、对目前的行动或状况的推测（情态动词+do）
（1）、在肯定句中，表示很有把握的推测时用must，而不太有把握时则用may, might或could,三者依次could的语气最弱。
e.g. You must be very tired. 你一定很累。
（= I am sure that you are very tired.） ( 很有把握)
You may / might / could be very tired. 你可能很累吧！
(=Perhaps / Maybe you are very tired.)（不太有把握）
（2）、在否定句中，can't 则表示“不可能”，语气最强，而相应地may not, might not 语气弱些，表示“可能不”。
e.g. He can't be at home. 他不可能在家。（很有把握）
He may not / might not be at home. 他可能不在家。（不太有把握）
（3）、疑问句中，通常用can表推测。
e.g. - Someone is knocking at the door.
- Who can it be ? 可能是谁呢？
Where can he be now? 他现在有可能在哪呢？
二、对过去的动作或状况的推断常用“情态动词+have done”。语气强弱与以上三点相同，可依次类推。但表示“过去不可能”时，除了可用can't have done之外还可用couldn't have done。
e.g. He must have gone to Wuhan. （肯定已经去了）
He may / might / could have gone to Wuhan. （可能已去了）
He can not / could not have gone to Wuhan. （不可能已去了）
Can he have gone to Wuhan? （可能去了吗？）
can(could)/may(might)/must/will等+have+done用来对过去发生的情况做出语气强
弱不同的推测。具体使用时请注意以下几点：
① can一般用于疑问句和否定句, 极少用于肯定句。
e.g. ---Can she have gone to school?
---No, she can't have gone to school. I saw her just now.
② may表推测，一般不用于疑问句；疑问句中该用can, could或might。
e.g. How could he have forgotten such an important thing? （不用may）
Might you have met him somewhere? （不用may）
③ could, may, might 用于肯定句语气较弱，must用于肯定句语气很强; may,
might 用于否定句语气较弱，can, could 用于否定句语气很强。
e.g. He could/may/might have gone to school. 他可能上学去了。
He must have gone to school. 他肯定是上学去了。
He may/might not have gone to school. 他也许没去上学。
He can't/couldn't have gone to school. 他肯定没去上学。
④ must表推测，一般不用于否定句；否定句中该用can或could。
误：We mustn't have met before.
正：We can't have met before.
needn't + have + done 可用来表示“已做了多余的事”。
e.g. There is no school today. You needn't have come.
could + have + done 可用来表示没做某事的“遗憾”。
e.g. She came here on foot, but she could have come by bus.
could / might + have + done 也可用来表示委婉的批评。
e.g. You could have come 5 minutes earlier.
You might at least have written me a letter.
在反意问句中，表推测的情态动词不出现在简短问句部分,取而代之的应是情态动
词。句中有过去时间状语的，问句部分用过去时，否则，用现在完成时。
e.g. He must have been there yesterday, wasn't he?
He must have been there, hasn't he?
He can't have been there yesterday, was he?
He can't have been there, has he?
三、由上我们可以得出一个结论：表推测时，must只用在肯定句中，而 can只用于否定句和疑问句中。而实际上can可用于肯定句中，但这常用于表可能性，意义有所不同，译为“有时候可能”。
e.g. Old newspaper can be useful.
旧报纸有时候还是有用的。
It can get quite cold here at night.
晚上这里有时候会相当冷。
习题对话
Language pratice
1. Choose the proper word or phrase to take the place of the underlined word(s) in the sentences.
①.glass=transparent ②. think=assume ③. make clear=clarity
④. environment=surroundings ⑤. obvious=apparent ⑥.towards one=sideways
⑦. distinguish=tell…apart… small circles=small dots
⑧. got=obtained enough=adequate
2. Use the words in the brackets to answer the question(refer to the Reading)
3. Fill in the blanks with the proper modal verbs.
Dialogue 1: shall; must; needn’t; can; may; may/ can; would; can’t; must
Dialogue 2: could; can; may; must; may; would; can; may/ might; would
考题档案
1. (NMET 全国) I don't mind picking up your things from the store. _______ , the walk will do me good.
A. Sooner or later B. Besides C. In time D. Still
2. (NMET2004上海春) I am sorry it’s my power to make a final decision on the project. A. over B. above C. off D. beyond
3. (NMET2004上海春) I have read the material several times but it doesn’t make any to me.
A. meaning B. importance C. sense D. significance
4. (NMET2004湖南) ---- Excuse me, but I want to use your computer to type a report.
---- You ______ have my computer if you don't take care of it.
A. shan't B. might not C. needn't D. shouldn't
5. (NMET2004 天津)- What were you doing when Tony phoned you ?
- I had just finished my work and to take a shower .
A. had started B. started C. have started D. was starting
6. (NMET2004 江苏) I accept that he is not perfect, I do actually like the person.
A. While B. Since C. Before D. Unless
7. A modern city has been set up in was a wasteland ten years ago .
A. what B. which C. that D. where
8. The house tent is expensive. I've got about half the space I had at home and I'm paying __ here.
A. as three times much B. as much three time C. much as three times D. three times as much
9. (NMET1995) She thought I was talking about her daughter, ______in fact, I was talking about my daughter.
A. whom B. where C. which D. while
10. [NMET上海] We advertised for pupils last autumn, and got________ 60.
A. more than B. more of C. as much as D. so many as
11.--Would you like me ________ the radio a bit?
--No, it's all right. I'm used to ________ with the radio _________.
A．to turn up; work; on B．to turn down; working; off
C．turning up; working; off D．to turn down; working; on
12.--What's the matter? You really look upset.
-- ___________.
--Well, better luck next time.
A．Why, I always look up to you B．I failed an important test
C．I have a bad cold D．Me? I never look down upon anybody
13. I remember _________ this used to be a very small village.
A．when B．how C．where D．what
14.The computers made by our company sell best, but several year's ago no one could have
imagined the role in the markets that they ________.
A．were playing B．were to play C．have played D．played
15.--When did Miss Wang leave the office?
--She left ________ you turned back to write on the blackboard.
A．the minute B．a time C．until D．unless
1. B besides副词，＂况且＂
2. D 3. C make sense是固定短语，是＂有意义＂的意思
3. 4.A 5. D
6. A while 是＂虽然…但是…＂的意思 7.A
8. D 是对倍数表达法的考查倍数词一律放在＂as＂之前 9. D
10. A more than 是＂多余，超过＂的意思
11. D 12. B 13. A 14. B 15. A
一课一测
（检测自己的能力）
A级（基础训练）
第一部分 单项填空
1. Which of the following is right?
A. What’s wrong with the machine? B. What is the trouble with the machine?
C. What is the matter with the machine? D. All of the above.
2.The boat______ ， throwing the boy into the water.
A. turned over B. turned down C. turned up D. turned out
3. --The dish is delicious!
--Well, at least it's ________ the one I cooked yesterday.
A. as bad as B. no worse than C. as well as D. not better than
4. Words _____ meaning, as we all know.
A. convince B. convey C. contribute D. conquer
5. You will find a map of great ____ in helping you to get round London.
A. price B. cost C. value D. usefulness
6. I told Sally how to get there, but perhaps I _______ for her.
A. had to write it outB. must have written it out
C. should have written it out D. ought to write it out
7. --I am going to the office.
--______you're there, can you get me some stamps? (NMET\\'99)
A. As B. While C. Because D. If
8. The engine of the ship suddenly failed and then came a big storm , which the helplessness of the crew at sea .
A．resulted from B．added to C．turned out D．brought about
9._____by the bullets whistling by, the timid fellow hid his head in the bush,_____.
A. Frightened; left his body exposing B. Frightening; and left his body exposed
C. Frightening; leaving his body exposed D. Frightened; leaving his body exposed
10. I have always been honest and straightforward, and it doesn’t matter ____ that I’m talking to.
A. who it is B. who is it C. it is who D. it is whom
B级（应用创新）
第一部分 单项填空
1._____there is no loss of speed over the blades, we can calculate the outlet velocity of the steam.
A. Assuming that B. So that C. Such that D. In order that
2. I know this is not quite the right word, but I can’t be bothered to think of .
A．a better B．a best C．the better D．the good
3．He spent several hours in the wind and snow, .
A．coldly and hungrily B．cold and hungry
C．being cold and hungry D．in cold and hunger
4．-Henry doesn’t seem to be what he was.
-No. so much in the war has made him more thoughtful.
A．Seen B．His seeing C．Having seen D．To have seen
5．If you lend me 500 pounds, it will me having to go to the bank.
A．save B．share C．serve D．help
6．It’s good that we to the park because it has sharted to rain.
A．don’t go B．hadn’t gone C．didn’t go D．wasn’t going
7．I’ve never been so poor able to afford a meal.
A．as to be not B．not as to be C．as not to be D．as to not be
8．I like during the Spring Festival when everyone stays with his family.
A．this B．that C．one D．it
9．There are ten waiting rooms at the newly-built station, in all 20,000 people.
A．seating B．seated C．sitting D．to seat
10．It is the protection for trees really matters, how many trees are planted.
A．what, besides B．that, except
C．that, rather than D．what, other than
11．It is hightly desirable that every effort to reduce the pollution in Beijing.
A．is made B．was made C．were made D．be made
12．-Mary looks hot and dry.
-So you if you had a high fever.
A．do B．are C．will D．would
13．There were a lot of people in the reading room, most of with their heads bent down over their books.
A．them B．whom C．that D．which
14．His income today is double it was five years ago.
A．that B．which C．what D．as
15．Government reports, legal papers and most business letters are the main situations
English is used.
A．when B．that C．how D．where
第二部分 完形填空（共20小题；每小题1.5分, 满分30分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从36---55各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C、D）中，选出最佳选项。
A soccer referee (裁判)punished for scoring a goal while taking charge of a game has quit the job after being found guilty of bringing the game into shame by the Essex County Football Association. The Essex County Football Association said that they were disappointed by the __1__ of Savill, who hit the headlines last year when his sympathy for a team getting beaten 1-18 went __2__ . “It is a pretty rare __3__ and hopefully it won't happen again.” Essex County FA chief executive Phil Sammons said.
Brian Savill was taking __4__ of a Great Bromley Cup game in the South of England between Earls Colne and Wimple. With 10 minutes __5__ and Wimple falling behind 1-18, Savill found the ball at his __6__ in front of the Earls Colne goal and quickly _7__it into the net, __8__ signaling a goal.
The laws of the game state that the referee is part of the playing area and that the game __9__ if the ball strikes him. There is no laws to differentiate between a (an) __10__or intentional contact. Savill's __11__ goal made__12__ difference to the result as Earls Colne went on to win 20-2, but the officials were __13__. The Essex County FA finally found 47-year-old Savill guilty and __14__ his job for seven weeks.
Savill, a referee with 18 years’ experience, officially announced that he would __15__ the job after finding out about the decision. “__ 16__ haven't got a sense of humor,” he told the Times newspaper. “It brought __17__ to everyone’s lives. It shows __18__ can be enjoyable and that we are not Hitlers running around blowing 19 all the time.” However, he advised other referees against following his __20__.
1. A. decision B. advice C. comments D. statement
2. A. wrong B. too far C. crazy D. very serious
3. A. case B. scene C. game D. score
4. A. pictures B. sights C. pity D. charge
5. A. going B. remaining C. ending D. leaving
6. A. hand B. feet C. back D. side
7. A. threw B. laid C. kicked D. hit
8. A. after B. while C. for D. before
9. A. continues B. wins C. delays D. ends
10. A. thankful B. friendly C. beautiful D. accidental
11. A. strange B. wonderful C. amazing D. helpful
12. A. little B. much C. doubtful D. sensible
13. A. watched B. pleased C. impressed D. tricked
14. A. stopped B. encouraged C. fired D. scolded
15. A. take B. leave C. improve D. refuse
16. A. We B. He C. I D. They
17. A. hate B. violence C. enjoyment D. friendship
18. A. playing B. inspecting C. scoring D. refereeing
19. A. wind B. whistles C. horns D. weapons
20. A. example B. humor C. record D. lesson
第三部分 阅读理解
A
The trees arrived by post, a half-open parcel. They were thin and straight, rather like arrows but with shiny leaves at one end and muddy roots at the other. Terry and his father took them down the garden and planted them in their prepared places. Terry had great hopes of the middle tree, now set in the holy spot where Henry, his cat, run over, had been laid to rest a year before. The nine trees made an avenue down one side of the garden, where there was already a fifteen-foot stonewall between the garden and the back yards of the Jenkins Street houses.
“Why do we want a row of trees as well as a wall?” Terry asked his father.
His father said, “For privacy. These trees grow very thickly.”
His father’s love of privacy often puzzled Terry, who was not one to keep himself to himself, but he could see part of the point here. The houses in Jenkins Street were on higher ground. His friend Leslie lived in number twelve, and Leslie had only to stand on a box to see right over the wall.
“Will the trees grow higher than the wall?” Terry asked then.
“Oh yes, twice as high if not more. It’ll take a few years but they'll grow.”
So they were going to have nine trees thirty feet tall, to keep them from being overlooked. Terry wondered why this was so desirable. He said, “Our garden is very pretty. Why can’t we let the people over the wall see it? That wouldn’t be showing off, would it? ”
“No, I don’t think it would be,” his father said. “Yet some people might feel a bit less happy if they can always see a good thing that isn’t theirs. We don’t want to be the cause of any jealousy if we can help it.”
This consideration for other people’s feelings must be a grown-up thing. Terry thought. It was not his idea of how to run things. He said, “These trees-it seems a lot of trouble to go to just to stop people being jealous of us,”
His father looked at him. “It isn’t much trouble, Terry,” he said. “These trees will grow without help from us. They’ll be beautiful. And listen to them. You can already hear them whispering to us in the wind. ”
1. How do we know that Terry’s father was expecting the trees?
A. He thought they would grow tall and thick.
B. He expected them because they arrived by post.
C. He and Terry had dug holes for them.
D. The parcel was half open, so he could see they were trees.
2. Part of the garden is called a holy spot because .
A. Henry had been run over just there B. a cat was buried there
C. Terry thought it was holy. D. it was right in front of Leslie’s house
3. We know from the passage that Terry’s father is a man who .
A. was proud of his garden and liked showing it off B. didn’t quite like his neighbors
C. preferred to keep his privacy D. felt jealous of the people in Jenkins Street
4. Why were the trees planted in front of the wall?
A. Because that was where they would grow faster. B. To improve the appearance of the house.
C. To hide the ugly sight of Jenkins Street. D. To stop people from looking inside.
5. According to Terry’s father, the thing that might have made the neighbors feel less happy
was ________ .
A. the wall B. the thriving row of trees C. the well-kept garden D. the privacy of the place
B
In the 1960s, medical researchers Thomas Holmes and Richard Rahe developed a checklist of stressful events. They appreciated the tricky point that any major change can be stressful. Bad events like “serious illness of a family member” were high on the list, but so were some helpful life changing events like marriage.
When you take the Holmes Rahe test you must remember that the score does not show how you deal with stress - it only shows how much you have to deal with. And we now know that the way you deal with these events dramatically（戏剧性地） affects your chances of staying healthy. By the early 1970s, hundreds of similar studies had followed Holmes and Rahe. And millions of Americans who work and live under stress worried over the reports. Somehow the research got boiled down to a memorable message. Women’s magazines ran titles like “Stress causes illness”.
If you want to stay physically and mentally healthy the articles said avoid stressful events. But such simplistic advice is impossible to follow. Even if stressful events are dangerous ,many - like the death of a loved one - are impossible to avoid. Moreover, any warning to avoid all stressful events is a prescription （处方） for staying away from chances as well as trouble. Since any change can be stressful, a person who wanted to be completely free of stress would never marry, have a child, take a new job or move. The idea that all stress makes you sick also takes no notice of a lot of what we know about people. It supposes we’re all vulnerable and not active in the face of the difficult situation. But what about human ability and creativity? Many come through periods of stress with more physical and mental strength than they had before. We also know that a long time without change or challenge can lead to boredom and physical and mental pressure.
6. The result of Holmes Rahe’s medical research tells us ________ .
A. the way you deal with major events may cause stress
B. what should be done to avoid stress
C. what kind of event would cause stress
D. how to deal with sudden changes in life
7. The studies on stress in the early 1970s led to ________ .
A. popular avoidance of stressful jobs B. great fear over the mental disorder
C. a careful research into stress related illnesses D. widespread worry about its harmful effects
8. The score of the Holmes Rahe test shows________ .
A. how you can deal with life changing events B. how helpful events can change your life
C. how stressful a major event can be D. how much pressure you are under
9. Why is “such simplistic advice” ( Line 1, Para.3) impossible to follow?
A. No one can stay on the same job for long
B. No prescription is effective in reducing stress
C. People have to get married someday
D. You could be missing chances as well
10. According to the passage people who have experienced ups and downs may become ________ .
A. nervous when faced with difficulties B. physically and mentally tired
C. more able to deal with difficulties D. cold toward what happens to them
第四部分 短文改错
Dear Mum and Dad:
This is a quick note tell you that we have arrived 1:________
safely and that we are having a real wonderful time. 2:________
The flight is very good and we arrived at our hotel 3:________
in time for our evening meal. The weather here is 4:________
much better than at home. Sometimes it rain a little 5:________
at night, and it’s sunny during the day. If the 6:________
weather is nice the next week，we’ll go sailing. 7:________
Today I have to write all my postcards. I want it to 8:________
arrive before we will get back home on Sunday. We're 9:________
all well, and looking forward to see you. 10:________
Hope all's well.
Lots of love
第五部分：书面表达
5月2日《蓉城日报》报道：某大型超市最近做出一项新的决定：为减少白色污染，超市将不再为购物的顾客提供免费的塑料袋。请你就此从以下几个方面发表自己的看法：
1．这一决定的利与弊
2．建议超市提供纸袋，顾客也可自带包装
3．要彻底解决白色污染的问题，需要首先提高人们对环保的认识
注意：1．词数：100左右； 2．参考词汇：《蓉城日报》：Rongcheng Daily
参考答案
第一部分 单项填空
1-5 DABBC 6-10 CBBBA
第一部分 单项填空
1-5 AABBA 6-10 CCDAC 11-15 DDACD
第二部分 完形填空
1-5 ABADB 6-10 BCDAD 11-15 AACAB 16-20 DCDBA
第三部分 阅读理解
1-5 CBCDC 6-10 ADDBC
第四部分 短文改错
1. note 与tell 之间加to 2. real→ really 3. is→ was 4. √ 5. rain→ rains
6. and→ but 7. 去掉the 8. it→ them 9. 去掉will 10. see→ seeing
第五部分：写作
One possible version:
It is reported in Rongcheng Daily that a big supermarket has made a new decision that in order to reduce white pollution, the market will no longer provide for the customers free plastic bags. In my opinion, the decision will have both positive and negative effects. As is known, people throw away used plastic bags wherever they want to and the white pollution, mainly caused by plastics, which is hard to break down, is becoming a danger to people’s life. There is no doubt that the decision will do good to the environment. However, it will bring inconvenience to the customers. It’s likely that fewer people will choose this supermarket and therefore the sales of the shop will be badly affected.
To solve this problem, I think the supermarket can provide paper bags or the customers are encouraged to bring along bags of their own. But what I want to point out is that stopping providing plastic bags is far from being the best way to protect the earth from white pollution. It’s not until everyone understands the importance of protecting environment that the world will be really clean.
蜜
蜜蜂的语言
有很多种不同种类的蜂.有些是聚居在大家族里,象蜜蜂,把它们的窝筑在树上或岩石洞里.还有一些则把它们的窝筑在地下的洞里.也有一些根本就不住在一起的蜜蜂.在不同种类的蜂之中,蜜蜂吸引了很多科学家,因为他们用一种语言来互相传递信息.1851年,现代蜂房的研制使研究蜜蜂语言的实验成为可能.
卡尔冯弗里希教授,一个澳大利亚的科学家,多年研究在黑暗的蜂房里蜜蜂是怎样以很巧妙的方式传递信息的.冯弗里希教授多年从事蜜蜂的研究工作,他对一再观察到的某些现象曾感到迷惑不解.当他把一小碟一小碟的蜜放在桌上时,蜜蜂不一会儿就来了.只要有一只蜜蜂发现了蜜,没多久便飞来许多蜜蜂.看来,一只(发现了食物的)蜜蜂能把食物的信息传递给蜂箱里的其他蜜蜂.这是怎样传递的呢?为了弄清情况,冯弗里希制作了几个特殊的蜂箱,每个里面只有一蜂巢.蜂箱的一面装上玻璃,他可以透过玻璃观察蜜蜂在里面的活动情况.为了便于区别,他在一些蜜蜂的身上涂上颜色.
当一只带有标记的蜜蜂从喂食的桌上飞回蜂箱时,冯弗里希就透过玻璃进行观察.使他惊异的是,这只蜜蜂在巢壁上跳起舞来.先向右转一圈,再向左转一圈.就这样一遍又一遍地来回转圈.但情况还不只此.这种舞蹈似乎使周围的蜜蜂也活跃起来了.它们成群地跟在这只蜜蜂后面,模仿它的动作.然后离开蜂箱飞到喂食处去了.这种圆圈舞好象是传递有关食物的信息.可是它还传递什么别的信息吗?
冯弗里希想弄清这种舞蹈能不能说明喂食处有多远. 因此,他安排了两个喂食处.
一个靠近蜂箱.另一个远离蜂箱. 他给所有来附近喂食处的蜜蜂标上蓝色,给飞到远的喂食处的蜜蜂标上红色.当蜜蜂返回蜂箱时,冯弗里希看到了一种奇妙的现象.所有到过近处喂食处的蜜蜂都跳着圆圈舞.所有到过远处喂食处的蜜蜂都跳着一种完全不同的舞--摆尾舞.跳舞的蜜蜂沿着直线飞,腹部左右摆动.然后它转半个圈,再沿直线飞,在另一边又转半个圈.它一遍又一遍地不断重复着这些“舞步”.情况清楚了.圆圈舞的意思是食物在近处.摆尾舞的意思是食物在远处.
接下来,冯弗里希和他的同事们在靠近蜂箱的地方设立了一个喂食处. 接着他们把喂食处慢慢地往远处移动.他们回到蜂箱近旁时,便仔细观察摆尾舞.他们用跑表计算蜜蜂在一分钟内重复舞蹈的次数.他们发现喂食地点越远,舞就跳得越慢,舞蹈越慢,在一分钟内能够重复的次数就越少.于是又发现一个令人惊讶的情况.每分钟摆尾舞的次数说明到喂食地点的距离.他们也发现蜜蜂在它们的蜂房和喂食处所飞的最大距离是3.2公里.
其次,冯弗里希和他的同事们要知道的是蜜蜂们是否能够告诉其它伙伴确切的食物位置.例如,蜜蜂能否交流具体的方向,像东西南北,东南和西南等.
当蜜蜂发现一个喂食处的时候,它们能够从蜂箱直接飞到喂食处. 不一会,一群蜜蜂就象一股小风暴一样从蜂箱飞到喂食处.几个世纪以前,“蜂线”这个单词就出现了,现在,我们就可以得出“给某人或某样东西作一条直线”的表达方式,意思是为某人或某样东西快速沿着一条直线走.
卡尔冯弗里希毕生研究包括蜜蜂在内的动物传递信息的办法,1973年,他和另外两个科学家获得了诺贝尔奖.他死于1982年.
篇2：人教版 高三英语新教材Unit 14 Zoology 单元复习教案
Unit 14 Zoology
Teaching aims and demands:
1. Get the Ss to read the two passages in this unit, developing the ability of reading comprehension.
2. Enable the Ss to master the key words and phrases, and some important sentence patterns in this unit.
3. The Ss can know about the language of honey-bees and Primates.
Focus on:
Tell apart; come to light; make a beeline for; one after another; communicate with…; troop; compare; except (that);
Time Allocations: 3 periods
Period 1 Reading comprehension
The language of Honey-bees
Step 1 Revision
Step 2 Lead in
Step 3 Fast reading
1. How do honey bees communicate with each other? (Para 3)
2. What information do the two dances convey? (Para 4)
Step 4 Careful reading
1.Karl Von Frisch did an experiment to research .
A. the food of honey bees B. the dance of honey bees
C. the hive of honey bees D. the way of honey bees’ communication
2. The phrase “ tell the bees apart” means .
A. let the bee live separately. B. tell one bee from the other
C. drive the bee away D. tear the bee into pieces
3. After the marked bees’ dance, the other bees_________
A. felt very hungry B. felt very happy
C. felt very angry D. become very excited
4. According to the text, bee’s language can communicate the following except_________
A. news of food B. the feeding place C. the sun’s position D. weather condition
5. The phrase “come to light” in Para 5 means__________
A. become known B. came to a bright place C. become visible D. became popular
6. Which of the following statements is possible according to the last paragraph but one?_________
A. We human beings can learn to communicate in the same way as honey bees.
B. We human beings can go as quickly as honey bees.
C. We human beings can come to each other’s rescue in a very quick way
D. We human beings can draw something from animals behavior
7. Which statement is more reasonable?_________
A. Only honey bees can communicate with each other
B. Some bees can communicate with each other
C. Most bees can communicate with each other
D. Only honey bee’s body language has most interested scientists.
Step 3 Further understanding
Explain some difficulties to make sure the Ss can have better understanding about the text.
Period 2 Integrating skills
Primates
StepⅠRevision
StepⅡ Lead in
Step Ⅲ Fast reading
Q1 What are the key features found in primates? (Para 1)
Q2 Do you think it is possible to teach chimpanzees to use language and do other things that we consider typically human? Why or why not? (Para 6)
Step Ⅳ Careful reading
Use the information in the text to complete the chart. Give example and characteristics for each type of animal.
Period 3 Language points
1．tell ------ apart 识别，辨别 动副短语 常与can，could，be able to 连用。
eg. Can you tell the two things apart ？ （tell apart the two things）
eg. The twins are so much alike that their own mother can not tell them apart.
tell -----from-----
2. one after another one by one
eg. They have solved problems one after another since they came.（强调数量之多）
eg. After class the students left the classroom silently one by one. （强调顺序）
3.They troop behind the first dancer, copying its movements.
troop Vi. 结队而行，成群涌向。 句子主语应是复数。
eg. The children trooped into the park.
eg. The game was over and the players trooped home.
n. 一群，许多。 军队（常用复数）
A troop of visitors /students (a group of / a line of)
copy 模仿，效仿
eg. You should copy his strong points ,not his weak points.
4.What else else 常放在疑问代词或副词后面
who else ,where else ,nobody else ,anything else
eg.Where else did he go?
注：所有格
5. faraway 遥远的 nearby 附近的
eg. a faraway forest a nearby hotel
faraway 作表语或状语用 far away , nearby 作表语或状语可用nearby, near by, near-by.
eg. The house is far away.
eg. They live near-by less than a kilometer.
6. come to light 发现，暴露 (to be discovered)
eg.The money didn’t come to light until the old man died.
eg. New facts about the case have recently come to light.
注：come to light ,come about 中come 不用被动态
7.make a beeline for sp. 走直路，走近路
eg. As he spoke he made a beeline for the door.
eg. If you want catch with the team, you’d better make a beeline for them.
head for sp.
eg. The ship is heading for London for repairs.
8.except/ except that /except for/ but/besides/apart from
eg. We all succeed _______ Tom.. (except)
eg.I looked everywhere _________ in the bedroom.. (except)
eg.He is a good man _______hot temper. (except for)
eg. Your article is quite good ________there are several spelling mistakes. (except that)
eg._________me ,there were ten other people at the meeting. (Besides, Apart from)
eg. The doctor told me nothing ______to stop smoking. (but)
eg. Last night I did nothing _____ watch TV. (but)
篇3：Unit 14 Zoology 全单元教案Teaching plan Unit 14 Zoology(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
Teaching goals
Knowledge objectives:
1. Enable the students to know the communicating ways of bees.
2. Enable the students to understand how Professor Karl Von Frisch’s experiment is done.
Skill objectives:
Improve students’ reading ability, especially in exploring the implied information. Improve students’ thinking ability, especially deducing.
Moral objective:
Promote the spirit of scientific thinking and cooperation and loving animals.
Key points:
To improve students’ reading ability and skills
Difficult points:
The ways bees use to communicate information of food
Teaching methods and tool
Multi-media method, acting etc. computer, recorder
Period 1 Words and expressions
Aims：
1. Ensure the students to pronounce the new words and expressions correctly.
2. Learn the words and their usages by heart.
Teaching procedures
Step One Greeting
Greet the students as usual.
Step Two Lead in
Read aloud all the words and expressions to make sure the students can pronounce them correctly.
Step Three Comment on the usages of the key words & expressions
( Cf the ppt files )
1. -ology 学问，学科
生物学_________心理学_________技术__________
2. take/get/catch/seize hold of 抓住 lose hold of松开
3. surrounding n. 环境，周围(通常用复数形式)
Animals in zoos are not in natural _________.
动物园中的动物没有自然的生长环境。
surrounding adj. 周围的，附近的
The dance seemed to excite the _____________ bees.
这种舞蹈似乎使周围的蜜蜂兴奋起来。
surround v.环绕,围绕
He used to live in a lonely village ___________ with mountains.
他过去住在一个四面环山的偏僻的小村庄里。
4.oppose v.反对
adj. opposed （to）与…对照
opposable adj.可相对的，与其他手指相对的
opposite adj／adv. 对面的, 对立的, 相反的 prep.在…对面的 n.相反的东西
用以上的词填空：
The woman sitting ______ is a detective.
Light is the ________ of heavy.
In London you must drive on the _______ side of the road to China.
I am here on business as_______ to a holiday.
He ________ the proposal to build a new factory.
Other animals except the primates don’t have _______ toes so they can hardly grasp things with their feet.
5.come to light显露，为人所知 come to oneself苏醒过来
come to one’s help/aid/assistance/one’s rescue赶来帮助某人/救助某人
come to + number合计，总计
come to an agreement/a conclusion/an understanding
达成一致/得出结论／达成谅解
come to sb被…继承
it comes to sb that…(it occurs to sb that) 想起
come to realize/know/understand… 开始意识到／了解／理解…
when it comes to sth 涉及，有关
____________________ that he had been wrong all along.
(他突然想起他一开始时就错了)
___________________ upon his father’s death.
(他父亲死后他继承了那栋房子)
After a careful investingation,_____________________(他们最终得出结论)
___________________________.(他债务总计五千元)
New evidence __________________.(新的证据终于显露出来)
When we are in trouble,he will always ___________________.(及时帮助我们)
__________________________the significance of the matter.
(我开始意识到这件事的意义)
6. dot n.小数点，小圆点
v. be dotted with点缀着，分散 The sky is dotted with stars.
Step Three Drills
Give the English for the following:
humour (adj)________ surround (n)__________
assume (n)____________ maximum (ant)_________
upward (ant.)________ change (adj)_____________
adequate (syn.)_________ adapt (n)____________
根据要求出单词：
1. He told us such a h__________ story that we all burst into laughter.
2. Animals in the zoo are not in their s____________.(环境)
3. There were t_______ of friends to see him off.
4. The professor is a specialist of studying a criminal's p________(心理).
5. The weather is so __________(易变) that he has caught a cold.
6. The woman sitting o______(对面的) is a detective.
7. The teacher told him to f_______ some chalk for her.
8. The victim was able to give a p________ description of the suspect.
9. The s________ cheered when he won the first prize.
10. The supply is not a ________ to the demand.
Periods 2 & 3 Reading
The language of honey-bees
Teaching aims:
1. Enable the students to know the communicating ways of bees.
2. Enable the students to understand how Professor Karl Von Frisch’s experiment is done.
Teaching methods
Team work learning Task-based learning
Teaching aids
The computer media system in the classroom a tape recorder
Teaching procedures:
Step One: Leading in
1. How do people communicate with each other?
2. How do animals communicate?
Step Two: Reading and judging
A. T or F
1. All bees do not live in trees.
2. Honey-bees interested scientists most.
3. Bees communicate the news of food to other bees outside their hive.
4. There are three dances mentioned in the text.
5. The number of wagging dances per minute told the direction to the feeding place.
B. Choose the best answer
1. The scientist can research the language of the honeybees because of the development of ____ .D
A. the modern beehive B. experiment
C. dishes of honey D. both A and B
2. The phrase “tell the bees apart” in Paragraph 2 means ______. B
A. tell the bees separately B. tell one bee from the other
C. drive the bees away D. tear the bees into pieces
3. After the marked bees danced, the other bees _____. D
A. danced together B. became very excited
C. seemed not to noticed it D. both A and B
4. Different dances indict different ______. B
A. food B. feeding place C. steps D. semicircle
5. The phrase “come to light” in Paragraph 5 means _______. A
A. become known B. come to a bright place
C. turn bright D. both A and B
6. The circle dances told the bees about ______. A
A. the position of the feeding place B. the distance of the feeding place
C. the amount of the food D. all the information about food
7. The number of the wagging dances per minute told ______. C
A. the position of the feeding place B. the amount of the food
C. the distance of the feeding place D. all the information about food
8. You can find the main idea of the test simply from _____. A
A. the title B. the first paragraph
C. the second paragraph D. the last paragraph
9. Karl Von Frisch made an experiment to research ______. C
A. the food of honeybees B. the dance of honeybees
C. the ways honeybees communicate D. the hive of honeybees
10. Which of the statements is possible according to the last paragraph? D
A. We human beings can communicate as honeybees do
B. We human beings can go as quickly as honeybees
C. We human beings can come to help each other in a fast way
D. We human beings can learn something from animal’s behavior
Task 1: reading the text and match the main idea with the right paragraph.
Task 2: find out the ways bees used to communicate information of food
Answer some questions
Para2-3 1. What the scientist assume first?
2. What did they do for their assumption? Was it proved?
3. What kind of a dance was found? ( flash)
4. What was the conclusion?
Para 4-5 5. What was the other dance? (flash)
6. What information did it convey?
7. What’s the difference between the two dances?
A circle dance Food is near.
dance
A wagging dance Food is far away.
Para 6 8.What do you think the remaining question is
Step 3: consolidation
A circle dance
A wagging dance
A faster wagging dance
A slower wagging dance
Step 4: Reinforcement
1. Group work Finish the exercises in the Post Reading section
Step Five: homework
Read the text again and underline the useful expressions and sentences.
彼此交流 令人惊异的方法
对…感到迷惑 把这个消息传给…
区分那些蜜蜂 靠近峰巢
表演舞蹈 使周围的蜜蜂兴奋起来
模仿他的动作 传达信息
看到奇妙的景象 仔细观察
被人所知 剩下的问题
获取更多的数据 对蜜蜂行为的充分描述
被授予诺贝尔奖 把…标上红色
走直路，走近路 成群结队的跟在后面
Sentences:
最使科学家感兴趣的是蜜蜂。（强调句）
很显然，这种舞蹈告诉蜜蜂食物所在的位置。（主语从句）
喂食处越远，舞蹈的速度越慢。
Period 4 Integrating skills
Teaching goals:
1. Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by practice.
2. Talk about animals and animal behavior.
Teaching procedures:
Step 1. Revision
Check language points by giving a dictation.
Step 2. Fast reading
In what ways are the higher primates, for example chimpanzees, similar to human being? How are they different?
Step 3. Detailed reading
Use the information in the text to complete the chart below. Give examples and characteristics for each type of animal.
Types Characteristics and examples
Primate 1. hands and feet can grasp and often have opposable thumbs and toes;
2. have a better sense of touch and the primate brain is larger.
Other animals 1. not good at holding, moving, and using objects;
2. have a weak sense of touch and small brain.
Higher primates Large size of brain, such as human beings and apes.
Lower primates Small size of brain.
Monkeys Have tails, small and walk less upright.
Apes no tail, larger and walk more upright, use sight more than smell, developed brain.
New world
primates Bigger and spend more time on the ground, such as monkeys, apes and humans
Step 4. Reinforcement
Deal with the exercises on page 126
Suggested answers to Ex 1 on Page 126
Primates Primates have hands and feet that can grasp or thumbs and toes that are opposable. Primates also have a highly developed sense of touch and a brain that is larger-compared to body size-than that of other animals. Other animals Other animals have smaller brains compared to their body size.
Higher primates Larger brains Lower
primates Smaller brains
Monkeys Most monkeys have tails; monkeys are smaller and doesn’t walk upright as apes; their brains are less developed. Apes Apes have no tails; apes tend to be larger and walk more upright; apes use sight more than smell; an ape’s brain is more developed; apes have fewer young
New world primates The group includes, among others, the spider monkey and the night monkey. New world primates are usually small and live in trees
Old world
primates The group includes monkeys, apes and humans. Old world primates are bigger and spend more time on the ground.
Suggested answers to Ex 2 on Page 126
Higher primates, such as chimpanzees, are genetically very similar to human beings. They walk like us (upright) and have hands and feet that can grasp. Chimpanzees and other higher primates also behave in “human” ways: they live in groups, they communicate with each other, and they use tools to find and eat food. However, these similarities do not mean that higher primates necessarily think like humans or are able to do what humans do, such as the solve problems and use human language. Some primates, such as chimpanzees, also have opposable toes, but human beings don’t.
Step 5. Language points
1. …are better than other animals 是比较级表最高级的用法
(1)比较级+than+ any other+单数名词
He is taller than any other boy in his class. 他在班上是最高的。
(2)比较级+than+ all the other+复数名词
He is taller than all the other boys in his class.
(=He is the tallest of all the other boys in his class.
(3)比较级+than + anyone (anybody) else
He is taller than anybody else in his class. 他是班上最高的。
2. have a sense of …
3. that指代“the brain”
辨析: it, that, one
(1)it代替的是前面提到的同一名称的同一事物，即同名同物，所指代的名词可以是可数名词，也可以是不可数名词。
(2)one代替的是前面提到的同名异物的任何一个（不定指），所代名词只能是可数名词，其前可代冠词，还可被this, that或形容词修饰，其后也可有定语。
(3)that代替前面提到的同名异物中特指的事物，所代替的名词可以是可数名词也可以是不可数名词，但其前不能有修饰语。
(4)如果前面提到的名词是复数形式，为避免重复，则可视具体情况分别为they, them, ones或those代替。
(5)it和that可代替前面整个句子的意思，而one却不能
(6)that可引导一个限制性定语从句,代替某个先行词(单复数名词均可),it和one则不能
(7)it可以代替不定式、动名词从句，用作形式主语或形式宾语，而one和that则不能。
4. Compared to (with)与……相比较
Compared to (with) her mother, she is tall.
compare…with…把……和……做比较
compare…to… 把……比作……
beyond/past/without compare 无比的; 无双的
5. feast on 或feast…on… 宴请(某人), 款待; 尽情地吃
He feasted his friends on turkey.
We feasted all evening on the best food and drink.
be a feast for the eyes
Step Five: homework
Finish the workbook exercises from Page 250 to Page 256
Period 4 Reinforcement
Teaching aims:
1. Review the key points of the unit
2. Comment on the workbook exercises
3. Practise writing a story
Teaching aids: computer system
Teaching procedures
Step One: Revision of the unit
(Cf: the word files)
Step Two: Comment on the workbook exercises
Refer to the workbook exercises from Page 250- Page 256.
Step Three: Assignment
Writing
星期五下午数学考试，你考得不好，心情郁闷。晚上几个好朋友邀你去歌厅(KTV)唱歌，你们一晚上唱得很尽兴。你用日记的形式记录下你今天的活动及感受。
日记需包括以下几个要点：
1．下午的数学考试你的成绩不佳，心情一直不好。
2．晚上朋友们邀请你去KTV唱歌，这是你第一次去KTV。
3．大家唱得很高兴，而你一直当听众，你觉得你的歌唱得不好，不敢去唱。
4．在大家的鼓励下， 你终于拿起麦克风 (microphone)，唱了一首英文歌曲 “I believe l can fly”。
5．现在你心情舒畅了，更重要的是你找回了自信。
6．你自己的感想。
注 意：1．词数：100 ~ 120。
2．日记须包括所有要点，但可用不同的句式表达。
3．时间：11月12日， 星期五，晴天。
Nov. 12, Friday Sunny
This evening I went to the KTV with some of my good friends.
This was the first time that I had been to a KTV and at first I didn’t want to go. I was ( had been ) in a bad mood the whole afternoon because I didn’t do well in the math exam. At the KTV, everybody sang their favorite songs very happily except me – I was only one of the audience. I dared not have a try because I was afraid that I couldn’t sing well. Encouraged by my classmates, I picked up the microphone and sang an English song entitled “I believe I can fly”.
I have become cheerful now and above all I’ve regained my self-confidence. I believe that the worst enemy in one’s life is oneself. I shouldn’t lose heart just because of one or two failures because I still have chances to try.
篇4：人教版高三英语（必修）第三册Unit 14 Zoology备课
Unit 14 Zoology教案（教师版）
第一部分课文理解
Warming up
Read the following proverbs and then match the Chinese meaning of each proverb.
一贫如洗 回家生闷气 饥肠辘辘 勿惹事生非 不要过早打如意算盘
披着羊皮的狼 一燕不成夏 拦路虎 把好人与坏人分开 亡羊补牢
班门弄斧 倾盆大雨 蠢得像头猪 江山易改，本性难移
人靠衣装，佛靠金装 小时偷针，大时偷金 潜移默化 爱屋及乌
1.To teach a fish how to swim．班门弄斧
2.The sparrow near a school sings the primer．潜移默化
3.Love me, love my dog 爱屋及乌
4.Look the barn door after the horse is stolen．亡羊补牢
5.He that will steal a pin will steal an ox．小时偷针，大时偷金
6.Don’t count your chickens before they hatch．不要过早打如意算盘
7.as poor as a church mouse一贫如洗
8. Let sleeping dogs lie.勿惹事生非
9.I'm SO hungry that I could eat a horse．饥肠辘辘
10.Go home and kick the dog．回家生闷气
11.Separate the sheep from the goats．把好人与坏人分开
12.A lion in the way．拦路虎
13.One swallow doesn’t make a summer．一燕不成夏
14.A wolf in sheep’s clothing．披着羊皮的狼
15.Fine feathers make fine birds．人靠衣装，佛靠金装
16.You can’t make a crab walk straight．江山易改，本性难移
17.It rains cats and dogs．倾盆大雨
18.as stupid as a goose．蠢得像头猪
Read the text and then match the general idea of each paragraph.
Para 1 1.The circle dance
Para 2 2.A brief introduction of the bee
Para 3 3. Whether bees could tell each other the exact position.
Para 4 4. The wagging dance.
Para 5 5. Pro. Karl von Frisch built special hives to study bees.
Para 6 6. The number of wagging dances indicates the exact distance to the feeding place.
Para 7 7. Something about the professor
Para 8 8. “Bee-line” and “ to make a beeline for ”
Key:
Para 1 2.A brief introduction of the bee
Para 2 5. Pro. Karl von Frisch built special hives to study bees.
Para 3 1.The circle dance
Para 4 4. The wagging dance.
Para 5 6. The number of wagging dances indicates the exact distance to the feeding place.
Para 6 3. Whether bees could tell each other the exact position.
Para 7 8.“Bee-line” and “ to make a beeline for ”
Para 8 7.Something about the professor
Read the passage carefully and then do the following exercises
Para.1
①Q: Why is it the honey-bee that has interested scientists most?
Because of the language they use to communicate with each other.
②You can find out the topic sentence of the text simply in para.1 from ____.
A.the first sentence B. the second sentence C.The fifth sentence D. the last sentence
③The scientists can study the language of honey bees only after the development of ____.
A.the modern beehive B.experiments C.dishes of honey D.both A and B
Para.2
①Karl von Frisch made an experiment to research ____.
A.the food of honey bees B.the dance of honey bees
C.the ways honey bees communicate D. The hive of honey bees
②The phrase “tell the bees apart” in para.2 means____.
A.let the bees live separately B.tell one bee from the other
C.drive the bees away D.tear the bees into pieces
③Which of the following statements is right?
A.Animals do have a language like that of human beings.
B.When Professor Karl von Frisch placed little dishes of milk on the table, bees soon came.
C.In order to be able to watch the bees scientifically, he built some special hive, a glass wall and marked the bees with little spots of colour.
D.When a marked bee returned to the hive from the feeding table, it began to perform a dance on the surface of the ground.
④What was Professor von Frisch puzzled by?
When he placed little dishes of honey on a table, bees soon came. As soon as one bee discovered the honey, many more came to it one after another in a short time.
Para.3-4
① The Language of Honey Bees
Dance
A circle dance A wagging dance
Food is near. Food is far away.
②How did the marked bee tell the message of food to the other bees? Give the follows in right order.
a.The marked bee returned to the hive from the feeding table.
b.It repeated these circles over and over again. c.The marked bee made a circle to the left.
d The marked bee made a circle to the right. e.The other excited bees dance together.
f.The bees left the hive and went to the feeding place.
A.abcefd B.cadefb C.adcbef D. dacebf
③Different dance indicate different ____.
A.food B.feeding places C.steps D.semicircles
④The circle dance communicates ____.
a.the distance of food b.the information of food
c.the amount of food d.the kind of food
A.abc B. abd C.ab D.bc
⑤Can you describe how the circle dance performed? And how the wagging dance performed?
the wagging dance
The dancer ran in a straight line, wagging from side to side. Then it turned in a semicircle, ran straight again, and turned in another semicircle to the opposite side. It kept the “steps” over and over.
the circle dance
First it made a circle to the right, then to the left. It repeated these circles over and over again. Then the surrounding bees trooped behind the first dancer, copying its movements.
Para 5
①What did the scientists discover?
They discovered that the farther away the feeding station was, the slower the dance was.
②What a maximum distance do the bees fly?
Bees fly a maximum distance of 3.2 kilometres between their hive and a feeding place.
③The phrase“come to light”in Paragraph 5 means______.
A.become known B.come to a bright place C.turn bright D.both A and B
④The number of the wagging dances per minute told______.
A.the position of the feeding place B.the amount of the food
C.the distance of the feeding place D.all the information about food
Para 7
What does “bee-line” mean ?
straight line; the shortest distance between two places
Para.8
①According to the this passage please give the information about Karl von Frisch
Nationality: ____________ Austrian
What’s he? ________________ zoologist/scientist
Research work: _________________ the amazing ways honey-bees communicate in their dark hives.
How to find it out: _________________ by doing experiments
His discovery: ______________________ circle dance & wagging dance
Prize:_____________________________won the 1973 Nobel Prize in physiology(生理学) or medicine.
②.After reading the text, you can infer the writer is likely to write about ____ in the next para.
A.Whether the circle dance told them what food was in feeding place
B.Whether the bees can tell one colour from the other
C.Whether the wagging dance tell the bees the distance and the direction of the food
D.Whether the language of honey bees is the most useful language of all animals
③Which of the statements is possible according to the last paragraph?
A.We human beings can communicate as honeybees do.
B.We human beings can go as quickly as honeybees.
C.We human beings can come to help each other in a fast way.
D.We human beings can learn something from animals’behavior.
根据课文内容填空:
There are many _________(varieties) of bee. Among the different types of bee, it is the honey-bee that has most interested scientists because of the “language” they use to _______________(communicate) with each other. The scientists Von Frisch built special hives to find out how one bee communicate the news of food to the other bees in the hive.
To his _____________(surprise), the bee who found the feeding place began to _________(perform) a dance on the ________ (surface)of the honeycomb. The dance seemed to _______(excite) the surrounding bees. They _________(trooped) behind the first dancer, _________(copying) its movements. Then the bees left the hive and went to the _______ (feeding)place. He found that the bees did the circling dance when the food is near, and that the bees did the ___________(wagging) dance when the food was far away. He also found that the number of wagging dances per _________(minute) told how far away the food was.
第二部分语言点
课文前面部分
1.A small animal that helps the police get hold of thieves.
一种能帮助警察捉贼的动物。
get hold of …= take/catch hold of …意思是“抓住…”；“获得…”
get hold of …= take/catch hold of …意思是“抓住…”；“获得…”
He took hold of the rope and pulled. 他抓住绳子用力拉。
I need to get hold of some money quickly.我需要马上就能有点钱
hold a conversation/meeting 进行交谈/开会 hold the line = hold on 别挂电话
hold … back 阻止… hold one’s breath 屏住呼吸
2.An animal that isn’t telling the truth. 一种会撒谎的动物。
tell the truth“说实话”的意思，tell的相关类似短语有：
tell a/the lie = tell lies 撒谎 tell a story 讲故事
3. You are going to hear an interview with a woman who works in a zoo。
你将听到对一位在动物园工作的妇女的采访报道。
interview 在这里是名词“采访”的意思，还有“面试”之意。
interview 在这里是名词“采访”的意思，还有“面试”之意。
The film star agreed to give an interview after the wedding.这位影星同意在婚礼后接受采访。
Your interview for the job is tomorrow你的求职面试定在明天
interview “采访”,要区别与cover的用法。interview 可以用interview sb. 或interview sth.但cover只能说cover sth.
A reporter interviewed the prime minister.一位记者采访了首相。
She’s being interviewed for the job.她正在接受求职面试。
They sent a great many reporters to cover the conference
他们派遣了很多记者报道这次会议。
cover除了“采访”的意思外还有“用……遮盖；覆盖”“占有…（面积）;掩饰”
“涉及…（内容）”等含义。请学习下面例句中cover 一词的各种用法
Since water covers most of the earth, Corsteau knew we should keep the seas clean.
由于水覆盖了地球的大部分，库斯托知道我们应该保持海洋清洁。
He tried to cover (up)his mistake. 他想掩盖他的错误。
He said he could cover the distance on foot in two hours. 他说这段路程两个小时能走完
How many pages have you covered? 你读了多少页了？
What are the main points you’re going to cover in your talk ? 你的报告主要涉及哪些内容。
We have only just covered our expenses. 我们所收入的仅够开支而已。
cover作名词，作“盖子”、“封面”解。
When the water boils, take the cover. 当水开的时候,把盖子揭开.
The book needs a new cover . 这书需要装个新封面.
4.What’s the problem with the animals at the zoo? 动物园里的动物有什么问题？
What’s the problem with…=What’s the trouble with…=What’s the matter with…
=What's your problem?=What's wrong with you? 都用来询问“…（你）怎么回事？”
5.The two teams take turns speaking. 两支队伍轮流发言。
take turns doing sth. “轮流干…”，turn是名词。
复习turn的用法
作名词用
It’s one’s turn to do sth轮到某人做某事
It's your turn to make a decision.该你来做出决定了。
turn one’s turn to do sth=do sth in turn=do sth by turns
作名词用：转动,转向,翻转
turn right/left=turn to the right/left
turn to sth./sb.(for help) turn to page 84
作系动词用：变得……
turn green/yellow 变绿/黄了
Ten years later，he turned teacher.
A./ B.a C.an D.the
注: 此题考查turn作连系动词的特殊用法,即turn作连系动词时后接表语名词，省略冠词.所以此题的答案为A.如果turn 后加into 则须在名词前加冠词a.
固定词组:
turn against背叛 turn down 关小/拒绝
turn from side to side 把身体转来转去 turn in 上交
turn...into... (使……)成为…… turn off(水源、煤气、电灯等)/避开(问题等)
turn on 开(水、煤气、电灯、无线电等)/对……发怒
turn on the radio turn out结果是/证明是/生产出
turn over(使)打翻/翻身/翻动/翻耕(土地)/转危为安
turn up 开大/出现/找到/证明是(=turn out to be)
6.When all the teams are ready, the teacher will start and time the debate.
当所有队伍都准备好以后,老师就开始为辩论计时.
time是动词，＂计时＂的意思，还有“安排好时间,使合拍子;安排……的速度＂
How long can you hold your breath underwater ? Take a deep breath and I’ll time you .
你在水下能潜多久呢？深呼吸一下，我给你计时。
He timed his journey so that he could arrive at the hotel before dark .
他安排好了他的旅程，以便能在天黑以前到达旅馆。
He tried to time his steps to the music.他尽力与音乐合节拍。
课文部分
1.Professor Karl von Frisch, a scientist from Austria, spent many years of his life researching the amazing ways honey-bees communicate in their dark hives.奥地利科学家卡尔冯弗里希教授，一生中花去了许多岁月，研究蜜蜂在黑暗的蜂箱里是以怎样巧妙的方式传递信息的。
amaze vt. 使惊愕；使大为惊讶：
He amazed everyone by passing his driving test.令人惊讶的是他竟通过了驾驶考试。
amazing “令人惊异的”；在西方人的口中，表示惊讶，经常可以听到amazing这个词。如果有些事情发生得出乎意料，难以置信，也可以用amazing来形容。
You’re amazing. 你真了不起。
It was amazing that the boy was able to solve the problem so quickly.
那男孩能这样快地解完这道题,真是令人惊奇。
有些漂亮或另类的东西，总能吸引许多眼球，就可以说是amazing things.
I am always looking for new and amazing items.我总是在寻找让我眼前一亮的新东西。
amazed 使（某人）感到惊奇，常用be amazed at / by 感到惊奇。
He was amazed at all the colours, and all the beautiful fish. 他对五颜绿色和各种美丽的鱼感到惊奇。
We are amazed at the changes in Beijing. I can’t even find where my old house is.
北京的变化使我们感到惊奇。我几乎找不到旧房子了。
2.In order to tell the bees apart ,he painted some bees with little dots of colour. 为了把蜜蜂区分开，他在一些蜜蜂身上涂上色斑．
tell...apart 识别，辨别 (复习)
Can you tell Jane and Lucy apart? For they look so alike.你能区别开简和露丝吗?她们长得太像了。
tell A from B 把A与B区别开
Can you tell Tom from his twin brother? 你能把汤姆和他的双胞胎哥哥区别开吗？
It’s difficult for us to tell Lily from Lucy. 我们很难区分开莉莉和露丝。
3.They trooped behind the first dancer, copying its movement.
它们成群结队地跟在第一只跳舞的蜜蜂后面，模仿它的动作。troop
①n.一群，大量
A troop of children went into the Museum.一群学生走进了博物馆。
troops of visitors 一群一群的访问者
troops 军队，部队
The local people demanded the withdrawal of the foreign country troops.
当地的人们要求外国军队撤离。
②vi.集合，群集；成群地涌向，结队而行
Children trooped out of /into the hall after the lecture.演讲结束后，孩子们成群地走出了/进教室。
4.over and over again=again and again=time and time again=over and over一再地，经常地，重复地
The old man always thinks of his happy old days over and over again.
这位老人总是一次又一次地回忆起以前的美好时光。
5. One was close to the hive. The other was much farther away ,beyond some trees.
一个靠近蜂箱,另一个远离蜂箱,几棵大树之外.
beyond prep（复习）
①在……那边，越过（场所）
The house is beyond the bridge.房屋在桥的那边。
I can not see anything beyond the river because of the fog
由于雾，河的那边我什么也看不见。
②（指时间）超出，晚于
Don’t stay out beyond 10 o’clock.不要在外边停留到10点钟还不回家。
③超出，为……所不能及（程度）
Your work is beyond all praise你的作品真让人赞扬不尽。
He lives beyond his income 。他的生活入不敷出。
beyond one’s control 无法控制；无法管理
The watch is beyond repair . 手表无法修理了
This problem is far beyond me /my comprehension 这个问题超出了我的能力/理解力
6.come to light 发现，暴露
Much more new evidence has come to light，so the judges have to sentence the man to death.
新的证据不断发现，所以法官不得不判这人死刑。
When the old woman died，it came to light that she was actually very rich.
老太太死后，人们发现她其实很富有。
7.compare A with B 把A与B比较一下（复习）
Compare British English with American English，and you can tell the differences between them.
把美国英语与英国英语比较一下，你就会发现它们之间的不同点。
compare A to B把A比作B
Poets have compared sleep to death.诗人把睡眠比作死亡。
compared to...=compared with...与……比起来
Compared to/with the earth，the sun is much bigger.与地球比起来，太阳要大得多。
8.come up
①前进，进来
My mother came up to me and held my hands tightly.母亲走向前紧紧地抓住我的手。
②上升
The sun came up at that time.那时太阳已升起来了。
He has stayed underwater for 2 minutes，but he hasn’t come up yet.
他在水下呆了2分钟了，还没上来。
③长出，发芽
These seeds haven’t come up yet.这些种子还没有发芽。
④被提出讨论
The question came up at the meeting yesterday.这个问题在昨天的会议上被提出来了。
⑤与come有关的短语：
come about发生； come across 碰见，受欢迎； come at袭击；
come down下降，流传 come out with 说出，透漏； come to oneself苏醒
9.include vt.（复习）
包括，包含
Your duty includes putting the baby to the bed.你的职责包括让孩子上床睡觉。
There are five chapters in this book，including two chapters written by our teacher.
这本书有5章，包括由我们老师写的两章。
Everyone will go to the cinema，Lao Xiao included.每个人都要去电影院，包括老肖。
10.transparent adj.
①透明的;清澈的 。
②显而易见的;一目了然的[+that]
It was transparent that her pride was hurt.很显然,她的自尊心受到了伤害。
③坦率的,光明正大的
He is a man of transparent sincerity. 他是一个坦率诚恳的人。
11.surrounding n. 环境;周围的事物[P]
He didn’t pay much attention to his surroundings. 他没有多注意他周围的环境。
adj. 周围的;附近的
Foxes started coming in from the surrounding countryside. 狐狸开始从附近的乡下跑进来。
12.apparent
①adj 表面的,外观的;未必真实的
The apparent cause of his illness was excessive drinking, but the real cause was his deep grief at his
wife’s death. 他生病的表面原因是饮酒过度,但实际原因是丧妻之痛。
②明显的,显而易见的;明白无误的 [(+to)][+that]
It was apparent that he was in no condition to travel. 他的健康状况显然不宜旅行。
13.So another astonishing fact came to light. 于是又发现一个令人惊讶的情况。
come to light 暴露,真相大白
The scandal came to light when the politician was seen with the lady.
当有人看到那位政客跟那位女士在一起时,真相就大白了。
A political scandal has recently come to light.
最近一桩政治丑闻暴露出来
14.maximum （反minimum）
① n.最大量,最大数,最大限度[C][(+of)]
Our goal is to achieve the maximum of efficiency.
我们的目标是取得最高的效率。
②顶点;(法定的)最高极限;(公路行车的)最高速[the S][(+of)]
Drivers must not exceed a maximum of 55 miles an hour.
司机不得超过每小时五十五英里的最大时速。
③adj. 最大的;最多的;最高的;顶点的
The maximum speed of this car is 150 miles per hour.
这辆车的最大时速为一百五十英里。
15.precise adj.
①精确的;准确的;确切的；丝毫不差的；恰好的
I can’t give you a precise date. 我无法告诉你确切的日期。
at the precious moment 正在那时
②明确的;清晰的
His instructions were not very precise. 他的指示不太明确。
③严格的;细致的
We had precise orders to come home by nine o’clock. 我们得到严格的命令须于九点前回家。
④刻板的,拘泥的
He was very precise in his manners. 他的一言一行都有板有眼。
16.adequate
①adj.能满足需要(量)的,足够的[(+for)][+to-v]
Martin thought that he had no adequate proof.马丁认为他没有充足的证据。
Is your salary adequate to support your family ?你的薪水足够养家吗？
②适当的；适当的[(+to/for)对于…]（不置于名词前）
a solution adequate to the problem 适合这个问题的解决方法
③胜任的 [(+to)]
She proved adequate to the job. 事实证明她能胜任此项工作。
④尚可的,差强人意的
That hotel is merely adequate. 那家旅馆只能说是差强人意。
17.clarify vt.
①澄清;阐明
His explanation clarified the mystery. 他的说明解开了这个谜。
②净化
It requires of us great efforts to clarify sewage in cities. 净化城市的污水需要我们很大的努力。
③使清楚,使清醒
My mind was clarified on this issue. 对这个问题我的头脑变得清楚了。
18.changeable adj.
①易变的;不定的
His temper’s been changeable this week, so don’t annoy him.
这星期他脾气变化无常,所以不要惹他生气。
②可改变的,可能被改变的
③闪光的;闪色的
changeable silk 闪光丝绸
19.adaptation n.
①适应,适合[U]
He made a quick adaptation to the new environment. 他很快适应了新的环境。
②改编,改写[U];改写本 [C]
This play is an adaptation of a novel. 这一剧本是由小说改编的。
20.Von Frisch assumed that the dance conveyed more information.
冯弗里希想弄清这种舞蹈能不能说明喂食处有多远. assume vt. 表示“假设，主观认为，假定；
①assume that…
We assumed that you understood the situation.我们认为，你了解形势。
②assume +名词+（to be）+名[形] .
I assumed him to be an honest man。我认为他是个诚实的人。
③assuming和given,supposing，provided/providing（that）等词一样都可以引导状语作用相当于if.
Supposing your father saw you playing computer games , what would he say?
=if your father saw ……
Assuming that the weather is favourable, Farmers will have a good harvest
假如风调雨顺，今年农民将获丰收。
Given that it doesn’t rain tomorrow，I will go camping.如果明天不下雨，我就会去野营
另：assuming自负的，傲慢的，过分自信的
④assumed 假装的，假的；假定的，设想的：
an assumed cheerfulness伪装的高兴 an assumed result假定的结果，
His look of astonishment was assumed.他那惊讶的样子是装出来的。
⑤assumption假定，假想
I was under the assumption that you were coming tomorrow. 我原以为你明天来。
My assumption that he had passed the exam was wrong . 我本以为他已通过了考试，结果我错了。
21.He marked all the bees that came to the nearby feeding place blue, and all the bees that went to the faraway place were marked red. 他给所有来到近的喂食处的蜜蜂标上蓝色，给飞到远的喂食处的蜜蜂标上红色。faraway(远方的)是由 far ＋ away构成的合成形容词。
nearby(附近的)是由 near ＋by构成的合成形容词。它们在句中都作定语。
a faraway forest远处的森林 faraway times遥远的时代
a nearby hotel附近的一家旅店 nearby hills附近的小山
注意：faraway在作定语时通常都连写，作表语或作状语时则分写(far away)。如：
The house is not far away. 那座房子并不远。
He lives far away from the school. 他住得离学校很远。
nearby既可作定语，又可作状语；既可以连写(nearby)，也可以分写(near by)，还可以加连字符(near-by)。
I saw her going to a near-by post-box before lunch. 我看到她午饭前去附近的信箱投信。
They live nearby----less than a kilometer. 他们住在附近，不到一公里。
He gave up his seat to the old man standing near by.他把座位让给站在附近的老人了。
Unit 14 Zoology学案
第一部分课文理解
Warming up
Read the following proverbs and then match the Chinese meaning of each proverb.
一贫如洗 回家生闷气 饥肠辘辘 勿惹事生非 不要过早打如意算盘
披着羊皮的狼 一燕不成夏 拦路虎 把好人与坏人分开 亡羊补牢
班门弄斧 倾盆大雨 蠢得像头猪 江山易改，本性难移
人靠衣装，佛靠金装 小时偷针，大时偷金 潜移默化 爱屋及乌
1.To teach a fish how to swim．
2.The sparrow near a school sings the primer．
3.Love me, love my dog
4.Look the barn door after the horse is stolen．
5.He that will steal a pin will steal an ox．
6.Don’t count your chickens before they hatch．
7.as poor as a church mouse
8. Let sleeping dogs lie.
9.I'm SO hungry that I could eat a horse．
10.Go home and kick the dog．
11.Separate the sheep from the goats．
12.A lion in the way．
13.One swallow doesn’t make a summer
14.A wolf in sheep’s clothing．
15.Fine feathers make fine birds．
16.You can’t make a crab walk straight．
17.It rains cats and dogs．
18.as stupid as a goose．
Read the text and then match the general idea of each paragraph.
Para 1 1.The circle dance
Para 2 2.A brief introduction of the bee
Para 3 3. Whether bees could tell each other the exact position.
Para 4 4. The wagging dance.
Para 5 5. Pro. Karl von Frisch built special hives to study bees.
Para 6 6. The number of wagging dances indicates the exact distance to the feeding place.
Para 7 7. Something about the professor
Para 8 8. “Bee-line” and “ to make a beeline for ”
Read the passage carefully and then do the following exercises
Para.1
①Q: Why is it the honey-bee that has interested scientists most?
Because of the language they use to communicate with each other.
②You can find out the topic sentence of the text simply in para.1 from ____.
A.the first sentence B. the second sentence C.The fifth sentence D. the last sentence
③The scientists can study the language of honey bees only after the development of ____.
A.the modern beehive B.experiments C.dishes of honey D.both A and B
Para.2
①Karl von Frisch made an experiment to research ____.
A.the food of honey bees B.the dance of honey bees
C.the ways honey bees communicate D. The hive of honey bees
②The phrase “tell the bees apart” in para.2 means____.
A.let the bees live separately B.tell one bee from the other
C.drive the bees away D.tear the bees into pieces
③Which of the following statements is right?
A.Animals do have a language like that of human beings.
B.When Professor Karl von Frisch placed little dishes of milk on the table, bees soon came.
C.In order to be able to watch the bees scientifically, he built some special hive, a glass wall and marked the bees with little spots of colour.
D.When a marked bee returned to the hive from the feeding table, it began to perform a dance on the surface of the ground.
④What was Professor von Frisch puzzled by?
When he placed little dishes of honey on a table, bees soon came. As soon as one bee discovered the honey, many more came to it one after another in a short time.
Para.3-4
① The Language of Honey Bees
. .
②How did the marked bee tell the message of food to the other bees? Give the follows in right order.
a.The marked bee returned to the hive from the feeding table.
b.It repeated these circles over and over again. c.The marked bee made a circle to the left.
d The marked bee made a circle to the right. e.The other excited bees dance together.
f.The bees left the hive and went to the feeding place.
A.abcefd B.cadefb C.adcbef D. dacebf
③Different dance indicate different ____.
A.food B.feeding places C.steps D.semicircles
④The circle dance communicates ____.
a.the distance of food b.the information of food
c.the amount of food d.the kind of food
A.abc B. abd C.ab D.bc
⑤Can you describe how the circle dance performed? And how the wagging dance performed?
.
.
Para 5
①What did the scientists discover?
They discovered that the feeding station was, the dance was.
②What a maximum distance do the bees fly?
Bees between their hive and a feeding place.
③The phrase“come to light”in Paragraph 5 means______.
A.become known B.come to a bright place C.turn bright D.both A and B
④The number of the wagging dances per minute told______.
A.the position of the feeding place B.the amount of the food
C.the distance of the feeding place D.all the information about food
Para 7
What does “bee-line” mean ?
Para.8
①According to the this passage please give the information about Karl von Frisch
Nationality: ___________ _
What’s he? ________________
Research work: _________________
How to find it out: _________________
His discovery: ______________________
Prize:_____________________________
②.After reading the text, you can infer the writer is likely to write about ____ in the next para.
A.Whether the circle dance told them what food was in feeding place
B.Whether the bees can tell one colour from the other
C.Whether the wagging dance tell the bees the distance and the direction of the food
D.Whether the language of honey bees is the most useful language of all animals
③Which of the statements is possible according to the last paragraph?
A.We human beings can communicate as honeybees do.
B.We human beings can go as quickly as honeybees.
C.We human beings can come to help each other in a fast way.
D.We human beings can learn something from animals’behavior.
根据课文内容填空:
There are many _________of bee. Among the different types of bee, it is the honey-bee that has most interested scientists because of the “language” they use to ____________ with each other. The scientists Von Frisch built special hives to find out how one bee communicate the news of food to the other bees in the hive.
To his _____________, the bee who found the feeding place began to _________ a dance on the ________of the honeycomb. The dance seemed to _______ the surrounding bees. They _________behind the first dancer, _________ its movements. Then the bees left the hive and went to the _______ place. He found that the bees did the circling dance when the food is near, and that the bees did the __________dance when the food was far away. He also found that the number of wagging dances per ________ told how far away the food was.
第二部分语言点
课文前面部分
1.A small animal that helps the police get hold of thieves.
一种能帮助警察捉贼的动物。
get hold of …= take/catch hold of …意思是“抓住…”；“获得…”
get hold of …= take/catch hold of …意思是“抓住…”；“获得…”
He and pulled. 他抓住绳子用力拉。
.我需要马上就能有点钱
hold a conversation/meeting hold the line = hold on
hold … back hold one’s breath
2.An animal that isn’t telling the truth. 一种会撒谎的动物。
tell the truth“说实话”的意思，tell的相关类似短语有：
tell a/the lie = tell lies 撒谎 tell a story 讲故事
3. You are going to hear an interview with a woman who works in a zoo。
你将听到对一位在动物园工作的妇女的采访报道。
interview 在这里是名词“采访”的意思，还有“面试”之意。
interview 在这里是名词“采访”的意思，还有“面试”之意。
The film star agreed to give an interview after the wedding. 。
Your interview for the job is tomorrow你的 定在明天
interview “采访”,要区别与cover的用法。interview 可以用interview sb. 或interview sth.但cover只能说cover sth.
A reporter interviewed the prime minister. 。
She’s for the job.她正在接受求职面试。
They sent a great many reporters .
他们派遣了很多记者报道这次会议。
cover除了“采访”的意思外还有“用……遮盖；覆盖”“占有…（面积）;掩饰”
“涉及…（内容）”等含义。请学习下面例句中cover 一词的各种用法
Since water covers most of the earth, Corsteau knew we should keep the seas clean.
由于水覆盖了地球的大部分，库斯托知道我们应该保持海洋清洁。
He tried to cover (up)his mistake. 他想掩盖他的错误。
He said he could cover the distance on foot in two hours. 他说这段路程两个小时能走完
How many pages have you covered? 你读了多少页了？
What are the main points you’re going to cover in your talk ? 你的报告主要涉及哪些内容。
We have only just covered our expenses. 我们所收入的仅够开支而已。
cover作名词，作“盖子”、“封面”解。
When the water boils, take the cover. 当水开的时候,把盖子揭开.
The book needs a new cover . 这书需要装个新封面.
4.What’s the problem with the animals at the zoo? 动物园里的动物有什么问题？
What’s the problem with…= …= …
= ?= ? 都用来询问“…（你）怎么回事？”
5.The two teams take turns speaking. 两支队伍轮流发言。
take turns doing sth. “轮流干…”，turn是名词。
复习turn的用法
作名词用
It’s one’s turn to do sth轮到某人做某事
.该你来做出决定了。
turn one’s turn to do sth=do sth in turn=do sth by turns
作名词用：转动,转向,翻转
turn right/left=
turn to sth./sb.(for help) turn to page 84
作系动词用：变得……
turn green/yellow 变绿/黄了
Ten years later，he turned teacher.
A./ B.a C.an D.the
固定词组:
背叛 关小/拒绝
turn from side to side 把身体转来转去 上交
... (使……)成为…… (水源、煤气、电灯等)/避开(问题等)
开(水、煤气、电灯、无线电等)/对……发怒
turn on the radio turn out
(使)打翻/翻身/翻动/翻耕(土地)/转危为安
开大/出现/找到/证明是(=turn out to be)
6.When all the teams are ready, the teacher will start and time the debate.
当所有队伍都准备好以后,老师就开始为辩论计时.
time是动词，＂计时＂的意思，还有“安排好时间,使合拍子;安排……的速度＂
How long can you hold your breath underwater ? .
你在水下能潜多久呢？深呼吸一下，我给你计时。
He timed his journey so that he could arrive at the hotel before dark .
他安排好了他的旅程，以便能在天黑以前到达旅馆。
He tried to time his steps to the music. 。
课文部分
1.Professor Karl von Frisch, a scientist from Austria, spent many years of his life researching the amazing ways honey-bees communicate in their dark hives.奥地利科学家卡尔冯弗里希教授，一生中花去了许多岁月，研究蜜蜂在黑暗的蜂箱里是以怎样巧妙的方式传递信息的。
amaze vt. 使惊愕；使大为惊讶：
.令人惊讶的是他竟通过了驾驶考试。
amazing “令人惊异的”；在西方人的口中，表示惊讶，经常可以听到amazing这个词。如果有些事情发生得出乎意料，难以置信，也可以用amazing来形容。
You’re amazing. 。
that the boy was able to solve the problem so quickly.
那男孩能这样快地解完这道题,真是令人惊奇。
有些漂亮或另类的东西，总能吸引许多眼球，就可以说是amazing things.
I am always looking for new and amazing items.我总是在寻找让我眼前一亮的新东西。
amazed 使（某人）感到惊奇，常用be amazed at / by 感到惊奇。
He all the colours, and all the beautiful fish. 他对五颜绿色和各种美丽的鱼感到惊奇。
. I can’t even find where my old house is.
北京的变化使我们感到惊奇。我几乎找不到旧房子了。
2.In order to tell the bees apart ,he painted some bees with little dots of colour. 为了把蜜蜂区分开，他在一些蜜蜂身上涂上色斑．
tell...apart 识别，辨别 (复习)
? For they look so alike.你能区别开简和露丝吗?她们长得太像了。
tell A from B 把A与B区别开
? 你能把汤姆和他的双胞胎哥哥区别开吗？
. 我们很难区分开莉莉和露丝。
3.They trooped behind the first dancer, copying its movement.
它们成群结队地跟在第一只跳舞的蜜蜂后面，模仿它的动作。troop
①n.一群，大量
children went into the Museum.一群学生走进了博物馆。
troops of visitors 一群一群的访问者
troops 军队，部队
The local people demanded the withdrawal of the foreign country troops.
。
②vi.集合，群集；成群地涌向，结队而行
Children after the lecture.演讲结束后，孩子们成群地走出了/进教室。
4.over and over again=again and again=time and time again=over and over一再地，经常地，重复地
The old man always .
这位老人总是一次又一次地回忆起以前的美好时光。
5. One was close to the hive. The other was much farther away ,beyond some trees.
一个靠近蜂箱,另一个远离蜂箱,几棵大树之外.
beyond prep（复习）
①在……那边，越过（场所）
The house is .房屋在桥的那边。
由于雾，河的那边我什么也看不见。
②（指时间）超出，晚于
.不要在外边停留到10点钟还不回家。
③超出，为……所不能及（程度）
Your work is beyond all praise 。
He lives beyond his income 。 。
beyond one’s control
.手表无法修理了
This problem is far beyond me /my comprehension 。
6.come to light 发现，暴露
Much more new evidence has come to light，so the judges have to sentence the man to death.
，所以法官 。
When the old woman died，it came to light that she was actually very rich.
老太太死后， 。
7.compare A with B 把A与B比较一下（复习）
，and you can .
把美国英语与英国英语比较一下，你就会发现它们之间的不同点。
compare A to B把A比作B
.诗人把睡眠比作死亡。
compared to...= ...与……比起来
，the sun is much bigger.与地球比起来，太阳要大得多。
8.come up
①前进，进来
My mother .母亲走向前紧紧地抓住我的手。
②上升
The sun came up at that time. 。
He has stayed underwater for 2 minutes，but he hasn’t come up yet.
他在水下呆了2分钟了，还没上来。
③长出，发芽
.这些种子还没有发芽。
④被提出讨论
.这个问题在昨天的会议上被提出来了。
⑤与come有关的短语：
come about ； come across ； come at袭击；
come down下降，流传 come out with 说出，透漏； come to oneself
9.include vt.（复习）
包括，包含
Your duty includes putting the baby to the bed.你的职责包括让孩子上床睡觉。
There are five chapters in this book， .
这本书有5章，包括由我们老师写的两章。
Everyone will go to the cinema， .每个人都要去电影院，包括老肖。
10.transparent adj.
①透明的;清澈的 。
②显而易见的;一目了然的[+that]
It was transparent that her pride was hurt. 。
③坦率的,光明正大的
He is a man of transparent sincerity. 他是一个坦率诚恳的人。
11.surrounding n. 环境;周围的事物[P]
He didn’t pay much attention to his surroundings. 。
adj. 周围的;附近的
Foxes started coming in from the surrounding countryside. 。
12.apparent
①adj 表面的,外观的;未必真实的
The apparent cause of his illness was excessive drinking, but the real cause was his deep grief at his
wife’s death. 。
②明显的,显而易见的;明白无误的 [(+to)][+that]
he was in no condition to travel. 他的健康状况显然不宜旅行。
13.So another astonishing fact came to light. 于是又发现一个令人惊讶的情况。
come to light 暴露,真相大白
when the politician was seen with the lady.
当有人看到那位政客跟那位女士在一起时,真相就大白了。
.
最近一桩政治丑闻暴露出来
14.maximum （反minimum）
① n.最大量,最大数,最大限度[C][(+of)]
Our goal .
我们的目标是取得最高的效率。
②顶点;(法定的)最高极限;(公路行车的)最高速[the S][(+of)]
Drivers must not exceed a maximum of 55 miles an hour.
。
③adj. 最大的;最多的;最高的;顶点的
is 150 miles per hour.
这辆车的最大时速为一百五十英里。
15.precise adj.
①精确的;准确的;确切的；丝毫不差的；恰好的
I can’t give you .我无法告诉你确切的日期。
at the precious moment
②明确的;清晰的
His instructions were not very precise. 。
③严格的;细致的
We had precise orders to come home by nine o’clock. 。
④刻板的,拘泥的
. 他的一言一行都有板有眼。
16.adequate
①adj.能满足需要(量)的,足够的[(+for)][+to-v]
Martin thought .马丁认为他没有充足的证据。
?你的薪水足够养家吗？
②适当的；适当的[(+to/for)对于…]（不置于名词前）
a solution adequate to the problem
③胜任的 [(+to)]
She proved . 事实证明她能胜任此项工作。
④尚可的,差强人意的
That hotel is merely adequate. 。
17.clarify vt.
①澄清;阐明
His explanation clarified the mystery. 。
②净化
It requires of us great efforts to clarify sewage in cities. 。
③使清楚,使清醒
My mind on this issue. 对这个问题我的头脑变得清楚了。
18.changeable adj.
①易变的;不定的
His temper’s been changeable this week, so don’t annoy him.
,所以不要惹他生气。
②可改变的,可能被改变的
③闪光的;闪色的
changeable silk 闪光丝绸
19.adaptation n.
①适应,适合[U]
He the new environment. 他很快适应了新的环境。
②改编,改写[U];改写本 [C]
This play is an adaptation of a novel. 。
20.Von Frisch assumed that the dance conveyed more information.
冯弗里希想弄清这种舞蹈能不能说明喂食处有多远. assume vt. 表示“假设，主观认为，假定；
①assume that…
.我们认为，你了解形势。
②assume +名词+（to be）+名[形] .
.我认为他是个诚实的人。
③assuming和given,supposing，provided/providing（that）等词一样都可以引导状语作用相当于if.
Supposing your father saw you playing computer games , what would he say?
=if your father saw ……
Assuming that the weather is favourable, Farmers will have a good harvest
。
Given that it doesn’t rain tomorrow，I will go camping. ，我就会去野营
另：assuming自负的，傲慢的，过分自信的
④assumed 假装的，假的；假定的，设想的：
an assumed cheerfulness 假定的结果，
His look of astonishment was assumed.
⑤assumption假定，假想
I was under the assumption that you were coming tomorrow. 。
. 我本以为他已通过了考试，结果我错了。
21.He marked all the bees that came to the nearby feeding place blue, and all the bees that went to the faraway place were marked red. 他给所有来到近的喂食处的蜜蜂标上蓝色，给飞到远的喂食处的蜜蜂标上红色。faraway(远方的)是由 far ＋ away构成的合成形容词。
nearby(附近的)是由 near ＋by构成的合成形容词。它们在句中都作定语。
远处的森林 faraway times
附近的一家旅店 nearby hills
注意：faraway在作定语时通常都连写，作表语或作状语时则分写(far away)。如：
The house is not far away. 那座房子并不远。
He lives far away from the school. 他住得离学校很远。
nearby既可作定语，又可作状语；既可以连写(nearby)，也可以分写(near by)，还可以加连字符(near-by)。
I saw her going to a near-by post-box before lunch. 。
----less than a kilometer. 他们住在附近，不到一公里。
He gave up his seat to .他把座位让给站在附近的老人了。
Unit14 Zoology授后练习
一、单项填空
1.-I really need to talk to you.______? -Certainly.What’s the matter?
A.Where are you going B.What shall I tell you C.Can you spare me a few minutes D.When are you free
2.-Since you like the fur coat so much，why not buy it? -Well，I can’t afford______coat.
A.that expensive a B.a that expensive C.that an expensive D.an expensive that
3.After a day’s work I was very tired and my legs______.So I didn’t visit you.
A.took over B.gave out C.put off D.set up
4.You can never imagine what great trouble I had______the poor boy who was hurt seriously.
A.help B.to help C.helped D.helping
5.The old man returned to Qingdao，______he left in the 1940s.
A.where B.what C.which D.how
6.-Dick sometimes makes me mad. -______too.I wish he______a little polite.
A.I;is B.I;were C.Me;is D.Me;were
7.The great temple______when I went to visit it last autumn.It must have been open to the visitors now.
A.was rebuilt B.was being rebuilt C.had been rebuilt D.was to rebuild
8.-Was it because the traffic was very heavy during the rush hour______you were late again?
-Well，I’m afraid so.
A.when B.that C.why D.how
9.As we know，the sooner coastal populations are______a coming tsunami（海啸），the greater their chances of escaping.
A.used to B.informed with C.warned of D.known about
10.In some countries，______is called “equality”does not really mean equal rights for all the people.
A.which B.that C.what D.who
11.You______pay too much attention to your reading skill，as it is so important.
A.mustn’t B.needn’t C.can’t D.won’t
12.Dr. Hans Selye is______member of University of Montreal faculty，and he is now organizing______International Institute of Stress in Montreal.
A.a;the B.a;/ C.the;the D.a;an
13.That voice on the phone was exactly as she ______it would sound.Just exactly like her father’s.
A.dreamed B.had dreamed C.would dream D.was dreamed
14. I often see lights in that empty house.Do you think I ______ report it to the police?
A.should B.may C.will D.can
15. You ______ be tired-you’ve only been working for one hour.
A.must not B.won’t C.can’t D.may not
16.-I don’t mind telling you I know. -You ______.I’m not asking you for it.
A.mustn’t B.may not C.can’t D.needn’t
17.-I’ll tell Mary about her new job tomorrow. -You ______ her last week.
A.ought to tell B.would have told C.must tell D.should have told
18.Last year he starred in the film ___________ of Bill Cornshaw’s best-selling novel .
A. adaptaion B. adoption C. promotion D. profession
19. There is more than ____________ rain this year, so some parts of the country have been flooded.
A. extra B. plenty C. adequate D. little
20. School in the north tend to be better equipped,__________ those in the south are relatively poor.
A. because B .as C.when D. while
21.What ____________ her apart from the other candidates for the job was that she had a lot of original ideas.
A. pulled B. set C. told D. took
22.With the aid of the most advanced equipment ,new facts about the ancient pyramids in Egypt have recently ________
A.brought to light B.seen the light C. thrown light D. come to light
23. -She’s a lot older than you , is’t you? -Fifteen years, to be ____________
A. frank B. precise C. honest D. fair
24.They believed that these modern paintings____in shanghai Art Gallery were as valuable as these in the museum
A. collect B. collecting C. being collected D. collected
25.At that time we had to make a assumption__________ the disease was nbspreading and take action to stop it.
A. that B. whether C.what D. which
26. - Would you mind going to ____________the kids from school ? -No,_______________
A. fetch; go ahead B. fetch ;not in the least C. take; not at all D. carry ; of course not
27. --Have you had many visitors yet? --No, __________, you are the first .
A. by the way B. as a matter of fact C. as a whole D. in other words
28. --Why didn’t you help the little boy? - Oh, sorry.He struggled to his feet _________I ran over.
A.until B. after C. before D. since
29. A lot of the children at the school do not live in the town , but come in from the _________ countryside.
A. surrounded B. surrounding C. surroundings D. surround
30.It was not until dark__________ he found ___________he thought was the correct way to solve the problem.
A. that ;what B. that ;that C.when; what D. when; that
31.It was becoming increasingly ____________ that he could no longer look after himself.
A. disgusting B . changeable C. transparent D. apparent
32.We need’t get ready yet; the guests___________ come for another hour.
A. mustn’t B. shan’t C. shouldn’t D. needn’t
二、用动词的适当形式填空
1.This is the best way （lead）to success.
2.It’s at the school （name）after the hero that he is studying.
3. （compare）to that book，this one is of great value.
4.Some waste must be thrown into the sea， （depend）on the nature of the waste.
5.The only （remain）question is whether or not we can collect enough money for wildlife.
6.The boy is an （advance）child.
7.Our plane will （fly）over the ocean at this time tomorrow.
8.Selecting a mobile phone for personal use is not a easy task because technology______（change）so rapidly.
三、句型转换：完成B句，使其与A句意思相同或相近。（每空一词）
1.A.Because there is not enough money，they can’t rebuild the school.
B.There ______not enough money，they can’t rebuild the school.
2.A.The house which belongs to him has been handed down for several generations.
B.The house ______ to him has been handed down for several generations.
3.A.The dances seemed to excite the surrounding bees.
B.The surrounding bees are ______ at the dances.
4.A.After this problem was settled，another came up.
B.After this problem was settled，another ______.
5.A.Many valuable paintings were discovered in the deserted house.
B.Many paintings ______ ______ ______ came to light in the deserted house.
6.A.Following the director，the actors came in one by one.
B.Following the director，the actors came in ______ ______ ______.
7.A.Everyone wants to go along a straight and direct course for success.
B.Everyone wants to______ ______ ______ ______ success.
8.A.If you don’t go to see our former English teacher，I won’t，either.
B.If you don’t go to see our former English teacher，______ ______I.
9.A.He marked all the bees that came to the feeding place blue.
B.All the bees that came to the feeding place ______ ______ ______.
10.A.After the meeting，they set out to solve the problem.
B.After the meeting，they ______ ______ ______ the problem.
四、单句改错：下列句子均有一处错误（或多一词；或缺一词；或错一词），请找出并加以改正。
1.Every time when the baby listens to music，he always begins dancing.
2.As is reported that the storm is on the way.
3.An accident was happened to him when he was on the way to the cinema.
4.It was during the civil war when Mark Twain’s life as a writer began.
5.I have offered a scholarship at the university for my further education.
6.The plan that you put forward to at the meeting is great value.
7.Your second-hand car is similar with his new one.
8.Liu Xiang set about to break the word record at that time.
9.He built a transparent wall through that he could observe what was going on.
10.Now a teacher is often compared with a candle.
参考答案
单项填空
1-5CABDC 6-10 DBBCC 11-15 CABAC 16-20 DDACD 21-25 BDBDA 26-32 BBCBADC
用动词的适当形式填空
1. leading
2. named
3. Compared
4. depending
5. remaining
6. advanced
7. be flying
8. is changing
句型转换
完成B句，使其与A句意思相同或相近。（每空一词）
1. being
2. belonging
3. excited
4 appeared
5. of great value
6. one after another
7. make a beeline for
8. neither will I
9were marked blue
10. set about solving
单句改错
下列句子均有一处错误（或多一词；或缺一词；或错一词），请找出并加以改正。
1. every time为名词短语，在句中起连词作用。 答案：去掉when或when改为that
2. It is reported that 句型中it为形式主语，真正的主语是that引导的从句。答案：As改为It
3. happen 意思是“发生”，无被动形式。答案：去掉was
4.此处为强调句型。答案：when改为that
5句意为：“我被授予大学奖学金以便继续深造”。答案：have后加been
6 be of great value意思是“具有极大的价值”。答案：is后加of
7. be similar to为固定短语，意思是“和……相似”。答案：with改为to
8set out to do...=set about doing...。答案：about改为out
9.在定语从句中介词后不能跟that引导的定语从句。答案：that改为which
10 compare A with B意思是“A与B相比”。compare A to B意思是“把A比作B”。
with改为to
篇5：人教版高三英语Unit 16 Finding Jobs教案及ab卷(人教版高三英语下册教案教学设计)
Unit 16 Finding Jobs
整体感知
Word study 1.barber 2.chef 3.accountant 4.adviser 5.typist 6.receptionist 7.greengrocer 8.astronaut 9.supporter 10.adore 11.vacant 12.outstanding 13.assess 14.staff 15.salary 16.occupation 17.amatenr 18.instant 19.flexible 20.shortly 21.nevertheless 22.drawback 23.applicant 24.personnel 25.accommodation 26.addition 27.qualification 28.modest 29.arithmetic 30.paperwork 31.punctual 32.tournament 33.draft 1.理发师 2.厨师 3.会计师 4.顾问 5.打字员 6.接待员 7.果菜商 8.宇航员 9.支持者 10.热爱 11.空着的 12.杰出的 13.评价 14.全体职工 15.薪水 16.职业 17.业余爱好者18.立即的 19.灵活的 20.立刻 21.然而 22.缺点 23.申请人 24.人员 25.住所膳宿 26.增加的人或事物27. 资格28. 谦虚的 29.算术 30.文书工作 31.准时的 32.比赛 33.起草
Useful expressions 1.hold back 1.退缩
Sentence patterns&
Communicative English 谈论喜欢不喜欢:
She likes/ enjoys/ loves... She is fond of...
She hates/dislikes... She thinks that ...is boring/terrible
表达希望愿望:
I intend/mean/plan to... I feel like doing...
I’d like to do... I want/hope/wish to do...
I would rather (not)do... I wish that...
If only I could...
Topics & Writing 掌握个人自述的写作方法
单元要点
背景知识
What should you consider in finding jobs
What should you think about in trying to find your career? You are probably better at some school subjects than others. These may show strength that you can use in your work. A boy who is good at mathematics can use that in an engineering career. A girl who spells well and likes English may be good at office work. So it is important to know the subjects you do well in at school. On the other hand, you may not have any specially strong or weak subjects but your records show a generally satisfactory standard. Although not all subjects can be used directly in a job, they may have indirect value. A knowledge of history is not required for most jobs, but if history is one of your good subjects you will have learned to remember facts and details. This is an ability that can be useful in many jobs.
Your school may have taught you skills, such as typing or technical drawing, which you can use in your work. You may be good at metal work or cookery and look for a job where you can improve these skills.
If you have had a part-time job on Saturdays or in summer, think what you gained from it．If nothing else, you may have learned how to get to work on time, to follow instructions and to get on with older workers. You may have learned to give correct change in a shop, for example. Just as important, you may become interested in a particular industry or career you see from the inside in apart –time job.
Facing your weak points is also part of knowing yourself. You may be all thumbs (笨手笨脚) when you handle tools; perhaps you are a poor speller or cannot add up a column of figures. It is better to face any weaknesses they do not exist. Your school record, for instance, may not be too good, yet it is an important part of your background. You should not be apologetic about it but instead recognize that you will have a chance of a fresh start at work.
细说教材
Listening
What do you expect they will discuss? 你认为他们会讨论什么？
【点拨】expect sth/ (sb)to do/ that
e.g. This is the parcel which we have been expecting from New York.
这是我们一直盼望从纽约发来的包裹。
e.g. You can’t expect to learn a foreign language in a week.
你别指望在一星期内能学好一门外语。
e.g. We expected him to arrive yesterday. 我们本希望他昨天来的。
e.g. You are expected to finish it in time. 希望你及时完成这件事
e.g. I had not expected that things should turn out like this. 我没料到的是事情结果竟然是这样
One of the students get in touch with a careers adviser.
一个学生与职业咨询服务人员取得了联系。
【点拨】get in touch with sb /lose touch with sb 与某人取得联系／与某人失去联系
keep in touch with sb/ be out of touch with sb与某人保持联系／与某人断了联系
e.g. I try to keep in touch with current events by reading newspapers.
我想通过读报了解目前事件。
e.g. We have been out of touch with my grandparents for years and is trying to get in touch with them by radio.我与祖父母失去联系好多年了，目前正努力通过广播与他们取得联系
Speaking
What jobs can your partner suggest that might be suitable for you?
你的搭档介绍了那些适合你的工作？
suggest sth/doing sth/that sb (should) do; suggestion后表示建议的从句也常用虚拟语气．
e.g. Can you suggest a way to solve the problem? 你是否能就如何解决这个问题提供建议？
e.g. They suggested to the foreigners a tour to the Great Wall. 他们向外国人建议去游览长城．
e.g. He suggested taking the children to the zoo. 他建议把孩子带到动物园．
e.g. I wrote suggesting that he (should) come for the weekend.
我写信建议他本周来．
e.g. It’s suggested that the work should be started at once. 建议这个工作应当立即开始．
e.g. It’s a good suggestion that we should have a short rest.
我们应当短暂休息会儿，这是个好建议．
suggest作表明或暗示意思时不用虚拟语气．
e.g. His cool response suggested that he didn’t like the idea.
他冷冷的回答表明他不喜欢这个主意．
e.g. Are you suggesting that I’m not telling the truth? 你是不是暗示我没说实话?
Reading
While he was still a schoolboy, he attended training sessions with a London club, and at the age of sixteen, he was invited to join Manchester United as a trainee.
当他还是学生时，就加入了伦敦一个俱乐部队集训. 16岁时被召进曼联队训练.
【点拨】join加入组织、团体、集体，成为其中一员；
e.g. My wish is to join the army after graduation. 我的愿望是毕业后参军。
e.g. Our headmaster will join us in the discussion this afternoon. 校长下午加入我们一起讨论。 join in 和take part in参加比赛、活动，后者指正式或大型群众性活动。
e.g. Almost all the teams of our school joined in the basketball match.
几乎所有我校球队都参加了篮球比赛。
e.g. We will take part in social activities during summer vacation.
我们暑假期间将参加社会活动。
attend指参加会议、仪式、典礼、上课、上学、听报告等
e.g. They didn’t attend the wedding. 他们没参加这次婚礼。
e.g. The three of us had a bad cold and couldn’t attend school/church.
我们三人得了重感冒，不能去上学/做礼拜了。
Every time he plays football he is watched by thousands of adoring Backs fans all over the world. 他的每场球都有世界各地成千上万崇拜贝克汉姆的球迷在观看。
【点拨】every time/each time/the first time/the last time/the next time和 the moment/ the minute/ the week/ the year连接表示时间的句子不用连词
e.g. The harvest will be got in the next time you come. 下次你来时庄稼一收好了．
e.g. The first week I stayed in the hotel I came across an old friend of mine. 我在旅馆住的第一个星期就遇见了一个老朋友．
Instead the employers---the football clubs---find the right abilities and offer them employment.
但雇主--足球俱乐部自己寻找有能力的合适人选，并给他们提供工作。
【点拨】为某人提供某物(常指无偿提供)可用provide sth. for sb. 或provide sb with sth
e.g. Our parents provide food and clothes for us. 父母给我们提供衣食.
e.g. They provide the poor with food and medicine. 他们给穷人提供食物和药品.
supply sth. to sb. 或 supply sb. with sth.多指有偿提供;
offer sb sth或 offer sth to sb. 多指主动提供.
e.g. Newspapers supply lots of information to us every day. 报纸每天给我们提供大量新闻.
e.g. In Britain milk is supplied to each home in bottles. 英国的牛奶是用瓶子送到各户的.
e.g. This shop supplies us with all we need. 这家商店给我们提供了我们所要的一切.
e.g. She offered me a cup of coffee. 她给我倒了一杯咖啡.
e.g. I offered my seat to a blind man on the bus. 在公共汽车上我把座位让给了盲人
e.g. The policeman offered to drive us to the airport. 警察主动开车送我们去机场.
China have special football schools where children acquire ball skills as well as a formal education. 中有特殊的足球学校，在那儿孩子们既学球技术，也进行正式的教育．
【点拨】as well as...和．．．一样 as well 也
e.g. He’s a talented musician and a writer as well. 他既是天才的音乐家也是一位作家．
e.g. They can speak English and Knows German as well. 他们能说英语也动德语．
e.g. The child is lively as well as healthy. 这孩子既可爱又健康．
e.g. He grows flowers as well as vegetables. 他种花也种菜．
e.g. The teacher as well as the students has made a mistake. 老师和学生都犯了错误．
as well as, if not better than...不比．．．差，至少与．．．一样好
e.g. Tom plays football as well as, if not better than David. 汤姆篮球打得不比大卫差．
There’s a lot of competition for places on the team, the salary is low and the job includes cleaning the changing rooms, toilets, and senior colleagues’ boots. 队里有许多名额的竞争，薪水很低．还要打扫更衣室,厕所和为高一级球员擦球鞋．
【点拨】 include 包含，包括
e.g. Does the price include lunch? 价钱里包括午饭吗？
e.g. A visit to the Great Wall is included in the tour. 这次旅游包括去长城。
在作状语时用 including sb/sth; 或sb/sth included
e.g. The price is 50 dollars, including postage.包括邮资价格是50美圆
e.g. We all laughed, the teacher included.我们都笑了，老师也笑了。
include表示包括可以分开的一个或几个组成部分，而contain表示含有,内含；也有容纳, 装有的意思.
e.g. Whiskey contains a large percentage of alcohol. 威士忌含酒精度很高.
e.g. Sea water contains salt. 海水中含有盐分.
e.g. This box contains soap. 这个盒子装有肥皂.
From this point on the success of their career and how much they earn depends on their performance and how many matches their team wins. 从这时起，他们事业的成功和能赚到多少钱就看他们的表现，能打赢多少场比赛．
【点拨】具体指某人某方面的成功用the success；一个成功的人或一件成功的事用asuccess；作抽象意义成功、成就、胜利时,不可数
e.g. The meeting was a success.会议开得很成功。
e.g. Failure is the mother of success.失败是成功之母。
When David Beckham was a child, he dreamt of playing for Manchester United.
贝克汉姆小时候就梦想为曼联队踢球．
【点拨】dream of doing 梦想作某事．
have a dream about sth 梦见某事
e.g. His dream of visiting Peking has come true. 他去北京的梦想是实现了．
e.g. The boy dreams of becoming a plot. 男孩梦想当飞行员．
e.g. I little dreamt of seeing you here. 做梦都没想到在这见到你．
Integrating skills
You need to convince the reader that you understand what the company or organization does, and what the job or course will involve.
你要使读求职信的人信服，你明白公司或组织从事的一切，能清楚了解这件工作或程序．
【点拨】convince sb of 或convince that 使某人确信某事
e.g. This convinced me of his honest.或 This convinced me that he is honest.
这使我想信他是诚实的．
e.g. He was convinced of his error.他认识了错误．
【点拨】involve 包含，使卷入；
e.g. Building this road will involve the construction of ten bridges. 建这条路要造十座桥。
e.g. He was involved in trouble. 他卷入了纠纷。
e.g. They were all involved in working out the plan. 他们都专心一意的制订计划。
考题档案
1. (95上海11) All the rooms are ___ with electric lights.
A. supplied B. given C. offered D. burnt
2. ( 湖南34) They’ve ___us $150,000 for the house. Shall we take it?
A. provided B. supplied C. should D. offered
3.（01北京春季14）---Did you remember to give Mary the money you owed her?
---Yes, I gave it to her ____I saw her.
A. while B. the moment C. suddenly D. once
4. (03上海春季36) ____ the meeting himself gave them a great deal of encouragement.
A. The president will attend B. The president to attend
C. The president attend D. The president’s attending
5. (03上海春季25) After supper she would sit down by the fire, sometimes for ____an hour, thinking of her young and happy days.
A. as long as B. as soon as C. as much as D. as many as
6. (01北京春季16) ---Why haven’t you bought any butter?
---I____ to , but I forgot about it.
A. liked B. wished C. meant D. expected
7. (02北京春季26) All the people ____ at the meeting were his supporters.
A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important
8. (02上海春季34) The famous scientist grew up ____ he was born and in 1930 he came to Shanghai .
A. when B. whenever C. where D. wherever
9. (01上海39) Fishing is his favorite hobby, and ______.
A. he’d like to collect coins as well B. he feels like collecting coins too
C. to collect coins is also his hobby D. collecting coins also gives him great pleasure
10. (01上海春季36) Mr. Reed made up his mind to devote all he had to ____some schools for poor children.
A. set up B. setting up C. have set up D. having set up
11. (NMET00,19) I’ve worked with children before, so I know what ____ in my new job.
A. expected B. to expect C. to be expected D. expects
12. (00上海37) He sent me an E-mail, _____ to get further information.
A. hoped B. hoping C. to hope D. hope
13. (NMET9712) I’d love ____ to the party last night, but I had to work extra hours to finish a report.
A. to go B. having gone C. going D. to have gone
14. (NMET04,23) The English play ____ my students acted at the New Year’s party was a great success.
A. for which B. at which C. in which D. on which
15. (04上海27) According to a recent US survey, children spend up to 25 hours a week ____ TV.
A. to watch B to watch C. watching D. watch
参考答案
1.A2.D3.B4.D5.A6.C7.A8.C9.D10.B11.B12.B13.D14.C15.C
6. meant to本打算去做却没做
10. devote...to doing固定短语
13. would love to have done过去想做某事
14.spend ...doing 固定短语
一课一测
（检查自己的能力）
A级（基础训练）
Ⅰ单项填空
1.A great deal of money as well as many clothes ____to the flooded areas.
A. is offered B. has offered C. are offered D. have offered
2. He _____ to lend me his new bicycle but I refused, for I didn’t want to trouble him.
A. failed B. offered C. considered D. insisted
3. --- Do you think the Stars will beat the Bulls?
---Yes. They have better players, so I _____ them to win.
A. hope B. prefer C. expect D. want
4. This dictionary is _____ to my translation, but that one is ______.
A. great help; helpless B. a great help; of no use
C. important; of few importance D. very helpful; of no any use
5. Gorge plays football ______, if not better than, Peter.
A. so well as B. as well as C. so well D. as well
6. ---How long _____ at this job?
---Since 1990.
A. were you employed B. have you been employed
C. had you been employed D. will you be employed
7. A new school was _____ in the remote village last year.
A. held up B. set up C. sent up D. brought up
8. They discovered a pot ____ thousands of gold coins under the ground.
A. containing B. including C. contained D. included
9. Don’t be afraid of asking for help ____ it is needed.
A. unless B. when. C. although D. when
10.---Hello, Jim. I _____ to see you today. Sonia said you _____ ill.
---Oh, I’m OK.
A. didn’t expect; were B. don’t expect; were C. haven’t expected; are D. are not expecting，are
Ⅱ完成句子（根据汉语提示补全句子，每空一词）
1．预料今天晚些时候会宣布一项通告。
They ______ ______ ______ make an announcement later on today.
2．我正设法与哥哥取得联系，他移居澳大利亚了，那时我们就失去了联系。
I’m trying to ______ ______ ______ ______ my brother; he emigrated to Australia, and I ______ ______ ______ him.
3．她拒绝了我们立即离开电影院的建议。
She refused our ______ that we ______ the cinema right away
4．我一眼就认出了他。
I ______ her ______ ______ I saw her.
5．他们也加入我们一起唱起了这首歌。
They all ______ ______ ______ ______ the song.
6．有一份广告工作提供给我做。
I ______ ______ ______ a job in advertising.
7．过去给我们供货的那家公司已经停业了。
The firm that ______ ______ ______ us has gone out of business.
8．我要到伦敦去，妹妹也要去。
I’m going to London and my sister’s coming ______ ______ .
9．我们终于使他们相信我们是清白的。
We finally ______ ______ ______ our innocence.
10．我要是你就不会卷入到它们的问题中去！
If I ______ you, I wouldn’t ______ ______ ______ their problems.
B级（应用创新）
Ⅰ单项填空
1. ---What did you mean by saying that?
---I mean no harm. I only _____.
A. meant helping B. want to help C. meant to help D. want helping
2. I like _____ in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.
A. this B. that C. it D. one
3. Mary kept weighing herself to see how much ____ she was getting.
A. heavier B. heavy C. the heavier D. the heaviest
4. The forest guards often find campfires that have not been _____ completely.
A. turned down B. put out C. put away D. turned over
5. My mind wasn’t on what he was saying. So I’m afraid I ______ half of it.
A. was missing B. had missed C. will miss D. missed
6. We have planted thousands of trees in recent years. This year _____ we’ve planted ten thousand trees
A. even B. just C. alone D. only
7. As we all know, air is to us ____ water is to fish.
A. that B. what C. where D. how
8. ---Mark broke his leg when he was playing football.
---_____ was that?
A. Since when B. Since when ago C. How long D. How long ago
9. ---Has Sam finished his homework today?
---I have no idea, He _____ it this morning.
A. did B. has done C. was doing D. had done
10. Nowadays the doctors are trying their best to reduce the people’s fear ____ they would be affected by the present disease called “Bird Flu”.
A. whether B which C. that D. when
11.---Can I help you, sir?
---No, thank you. I______ .
A. have served B. am being served C. can serve D. was served
12. A cook will be immediately fired if he is found _____ in the kitchen.
A. smoke B. smoking C. to smoke D. smoked
13._____ be sent to work there?
A. Who do you suggest B. Who do you suggest that should
C. Do you suggest who should D. Do you suggest whom should
14.You are saying that everyone should be equal, and this is _____ I disagree.
A. why B. where C. what D. how
15.---May I put my luggage on the seat beside you, madam? If it is free?
---________ .
A. Sure, with pleasure B. Oh, please yourself C. Well, never mind D. Yes, help yourself
Ⅱ．完形填空
My First Job
I was six when I joined my father and tow elder brothers at sunrise in the fields of Eufaula, Okla.___1__ the time I was eight I was helping Dad fix up old furniture. He gave me a cent for every nail I __2__ out of old boards.
I got my first__3__ job, at JM’s Restaurant in town, when I was 12.My main responsibilities (职责) were___4___ tables and washing dishes. __5__ sometimes I helped cook..
Every day after school I would___6__ to JM’s and work until ten. Even on Saturdays I ___7___from two until eleven. At that age it was difficult going to work and ___8___ my friends run off to swim or play .I didn’t necessarily like work, but I loved what working __9___ me to have . Because of my__10__ I was always the one buying when my friends and I went to the local Tastee Freez. This made me__11__ .
Word that I was trustworthy and hard-working__12__ around town. A local clothing store offered me credit (赊帐)__13__ I was only in seventh grade. I immediately__14__ a $68 sports coat and a $22 pair of shoes. I was __15__ only 65 cents and hour, and I already owed the storekeeper $90! So I learned __16___ the danger of easy credit. I paid it __17__ as soon as I could.
My first job taught me self-control, responsibility and brought me a _18__ of personal satisfaction few of my friends had experienced. As my father, _19__ worked three jobs ,once told me, “If you __20__sacrifice(奉献) and responsibility, there are not many things in life you can’t have.” How right he was.
1. A. Before B. Within C. From D. By
2. A. pulled B. put C. picked D. pressed
3. A. usual B. real C. main D. packing
4.A.sweeping B. packing C. cleaning D. emptying
5.A orB so C. but D.even
6.A.head B. turn C. change D. move
7.A.studied B. worked C. played D. slept
8.A.helping B. having C. watching D. letting
9.A.asked B. old C. promised D. allowed
10. A. study B. power C. age D. job
11.A. proud B. friendly C. lucky D. hopeful
12.A. ran B. got C. flew D. carried
13.A.although B. while C. if D. since
14.A sold B. borrowed C. charged D. wore
15.A.keeping B. making C. paying D. taking
16.A.gradually B. greatly C. hardly D. early
17.A .out B. over C. away D. off
18.A.point B. level C. part D. sign
19.A.he B. that C. who D. whoever
20.A.understand B. demand C. offer D. fear
Ⅲ．阅读理解
A
Last summer I went through a training program and became a literacy (扫盲) volunteer. The training I received, though excellent, did not tell me how it was to work with a real student, however. When I began to discover what other people’s lives were like because they could not read, I realized the true importance of reading.
My first student Marie was a 44-year-old single mother of three. In the first lesson, I found out she walked two miles to the nearest supermarket twice a week because she didn’t know which bus to take. When I told her I would get her a bus schedule , she told me it would not help because she could not read it .She said she also had difficulty once she got to the supermarket because she could not write out a shopping list. Also, she could only recognize items by sight, so if the product she wanted.
As we worked together, learning how to read built Marie’s self-confidence, which encouraged her to continue in her studies. She began to make rapid progress and was even able to take the bus to the supermarket. After this successful trip, she reported how self-confident she felt. At the end of the program, she began helping her youngest son, Tony, a shy first grader, with his reading. She ate with him before he went to sleep and together they would read bedtime stories. When his eyes became wide with excitement as she read, pride was written all over her face and she began to see how her own hard work in learning to read paid off. As she described this experience, I was proud of myself as well. I found that helping Marie to build her self-confidence was more rewarding than anything I had ever done before.
As a literacy volunteer, I learned a great deal about teaching and helping others. In fact, I may have learned more from the experience than Marie did.
1.What did the author do last summer?
A. She worked in the supermarket.
B. She helped someone to learn to read.
C. She gave single mothers the help they needed.
D. She went to a training program to help a literacy.
2. Why didn’t Marie go to the supermarket by bus at first?
A. Because she liked to walk to the supermarket.
B. Because she lived far away from the bus stop.
C. Because she couldn’t afford the bus ticket.
D. Because she couldn’t find the bus stop.
3. How did Marie use to find the goods she wanted in the supermarket.
A. She knew where the goods were in the supermarket.
B. She asked others to take her to the right places
C. She managed to find the goods by their books.
D. She remembered the names of the goods.
4. Which of the following statements is true about Marie?
A. Marie could do things she had not been able to do before.
B. Marie was able to read stories with the help of her son.
C. Marie decided to continue her studies in school.
D. Marie paid for her own lessons.
B
I’m seventeen. I had worked as a box boy at a supermarket in Los Angels. People came to the counter and you put things in their bags for them, and carried things to their cars. It was hard work. While working, you wear a plate with your name on it. I once met someone I knew years ago. I remembered his name and said, “ It was nice talking to you Brett.” I felt great. He remembered me. Then I looked down at my name plate. Oh no. He didn’t remember my name at all, he just read the name plate. I wish I had put “Irving” down on my name plate. If he’d have said, “Oh yes, Irving, hoe could I forget you?” I’d have been ready for him. There’s nothing personal here.
The manager and everyone else who were a step above the box boys often shouted orders. One of these was: you couldn’t accept tips. Okay, I’m outside and I put the bags in the car. For a lot of people, the nature reaction is to take a quarter and give it to me. I’d say, “I’m sorry I can’t,” They’d get angry. When you give someone a tip, you are sort of being polite. You take a quarter and you put it in their hand and you expect them to say, “Oh, thanks a lot.” When you say, “I’m sorry, I can’t, they feel a little put down. They say, “ No one will know.” And they put it in your pocket, you say, “I really can’t.” It gets to a point where you almost have to hurt a person physically to prevent him from tipping on you. It was not in agreement with the store’s belief in being friendly/ Accepting tips was a friendly thing and made the customer feel good. I just couldn’t understand the strangeness of some people’s ideas. One lady actually put it in my pocket, got in the car, and drove away. I would have had to throw the quarter at her or ate it or something.
I had decided that one year was enough. Some people needed the job to stay alive and fed. I guess I had the reasons and could afford to hate it and give it up.
5. What can be the best title for this text?
A. How Hard Life for Box Boys B. Getting Along with Customers
C. Why I Gave up My Job D. The Art of Taking Tips
6. From the second paragraph, we can infer that_______ .
A. the writer didn’t like the impersonal part of his job
B. with a personal plate, people can easily start talking
C. Mr. Castle misunderstood Irving for Brett
D. Irving was the writer’s real name
7.The box boy refused to accept tips because ________ .
A. customers only gave small tips B. some customers had strange ideas about tipping
C. the store forbade the box boys to take tips D. he didn’t want to fight with the customers
8.The underlined phrase “put down” in the second paragraph probably means ______ .
A. misunderstood B. defeated C. hateful D. hurt
Ⅳ.短文改错
Dear Lily,
I got your letter and pleased to hear about your job 1_______
interview at a grocery store. I know you wanted to 2_______
get a job at a TV station, but you’ve been looking 3_______
for several week now and haven’t found anything. 4.________
The job at the grocery store doesn’t sound badly. If I 5________
am you, I’d like it. If you worked there a while, you 6________
could earn some money. Its your decision, of course, 7_______
but I advise you to take it. Let me to know what you 8_______
decided to do. By the way, after you get the job you 9_______
can think about get a bike later. 10______
Ⅴ书面表达
你是李华，申请到一家外资企业工作。对方要求你用英文介绍自己的情况。短文应包括下表所列全部内容。100词左右。
姓名 李华 出生年月 1977年2月 出生地 辽宁大连
学历 1984－1990光明小学
1990－1996大连六中
所学科目 语文、数学、英语、物理、化学、电脑
特长 英语电脑（去年全校电脑竞赛第一名）
业余爱好 游泳、滑冰、集邮、流行音乐
参考答案
A 级
Ⅰ单项填空
1-5ABCBB 6-10BBABA
Ⅱ完成句子
1.are expected to 2. get in touch with; lost touch with
3. suggestion; leave 4. recognized; the moment
5. joined us in singing 6. have been offered
7. used to supply 8. as well 9. convinced them of
10.were; get involved in
B级
Ⅰ单项填空
1-5CCABD 6-10CBDCC 11-15BBABB
Ⅱ完形填空
1-5DABCC 6-10ABCDD 11-15ABACB 16-20DDBCA
Ⅲ阅读理解
1-4BDCA 5-8CACD
Ⅳ短文改错
1.pleased前加be 2.对 3.the 改为a 4.week改为weeks
5. badly 改为bad 6.am 改为were 7.Its改为It’s
8.去掉to 9.decided改为 decide 10.get 改为getting
Ⅴ书面表达
My name is Li Hua. I was born in Dalian, Liaoning Province in February1977. I started school in 1984 when I was seven. I studied in Guangming Primary School from 1984 to 1990. After that I went to No.6 Middle School of Dalian and graduated this summer. The main subjects I studied at school included Chinese, maths, English, physics, chemistry and computer, I like English and computer best and I am very good at them. Last year I won the first prize in the school computer competition. In my spare time I enjoy listening to pop music and collecting stamps. My favorite sports are swimming in summer and skating in winter.
习题对话
Language practice
1 1.with改为to 2.arranging 改为arranged 3.high改为 highly 4.对 5.to后加be 6.shortly后加before 7.at改为 of 8. from 改为than 9. 对 10. expensive改为 expense 11. means改为 mean 12.to改为 at 13.hugely 改为huge14. 对 15.trend 前加the
3. trainee young inexperienced keen careful
adviser wise helpful knowledgeable respectable
interpreter professional fluent exact
colleague kind friendly humor
amateur active enthusiastic keen
professional skillful hardworking cautious
chef neatly clean careful
Integrating skills
Writing
I have recently leaned from Xinhua Daily that an English secretary is wanted in your company. I beg to take this job. My name is Lin Ying, a girl of twenty-five. I have been an English teacher for three years since I graduated from the English Department of Zhengzhou Normal University. Besides, I have made friends with the foreign teachers from Britain and have no difficulty talking with them. I think I will be interested in the job as a secretary because I can speak and write English very well. I very much hope that I will be accepted by your company. Would you please reply to me once you have accepted me? And in future I will make more money for your company. Thank you very much.
课文翻译
足球, 该不该是选择的职业?
小时候的大卫是个足球迷, 他一有空就在操场上,伦敦东区住地的街道上踢球, 象成千上百万男孩和越来越多的女孩一样, 他梦想成为一名职业足球队员。 他拥护曼联队, 梦想穿上红衬衫在著名的老特拉福得球场在成千上万观众的喝彩中进球。
当他还是学生时，就加入了伦敦一个俱乐部队集训。 16岁时被召进曼联队训练。 大卫的一夜成名始于他作为曼联青年队球员在1992年赢得“足总青年杯”。同年入选“红魔”主力队。这是他非凡事业的开始。
现在大卫是英格兰著名的中场球员和世界明星。他的每场球都有世界各地成千上万崇拜贝克汉姆的球迷在观看。大卫 贝克汉姆实现了自己的目标，但其他有着同样梦想的孩子呢？他们是否也能实现自己的抱负？
足球与其他职业不同，因为雇主不在报纸或英特网上广告他们有空缺的工作。没有求职表要填写，也没有面试。但雇主--足球俱乐部自己寻找有能力的合适人选，并给他们提供工作。
俱乐部寻找高水平尤其是有天赋的年轻球员。高水平球员必须控球好，知道如何利用球场空间。职业球员必须相当出色，为高水平俱乐部效力一定要很优秀。但这不是仅仅靠脚上功夫算数的。俱乐部经理还想让球员有良好的球队精神，性格坚强，有毅力，态度积极。
许多国家建立了鼓励和发展青年球员，俱乐部评估球员，发现未来的球星。中国有特殊的足球学校，在那儿孩子们既学足球技术，也进行正式的教育。英国俱乐部派遣星探在全国范围内发现有足球天赋的孩子。这些星探观看成百上千场在农村，小镇和城市里的学校球队比赛。当他们发现有天赋的青年时，就邀请他们到俱乐部训练。如果球员在16岁以下，就一边上学，晚上到俱乐部集训，周末到初级球队打球。那些表现出色的球员在16岁时成为青年训练队员加入了俱乐部并能拿到薪水。这段时间他们接受指导，为青年队效力，但并非生活得很如意。队里有许多名额的竞争，薪水很低, 还要打扫更衣室, 厕所和为前辈球员擦球鞋。他们还每周一次到大学里学习足球专业其他方面，学习球场维护和办公管理。
2年后，只有极少数球员能够走进下一关。这些幸运儿与俱乐部签约，他们足球职业生涯就开始了。从这时起，他们事业的成功和能赚到多少钱就看他们的表现，能打赢多少场比赛。也许有一两个人能象贝克汉姆那样。可是，足球是竞争激烈的职业，所以许多球员并不那么成功，不得不放弃这种生涯去寻找其他的职业。
贝克汉姆小时候就梦想为曼联队踢球。他达到了自己的目标，使红色7号球衣闻名世界。现在, 他的发式跟进球一样著名。大卫的故事有了圆满的结尾，但许多有着同样梦想的孩子却永远没有机会穿上他们最喜欢球队的球衣，他们许多人只能作为业余爱好者在空闲时间踢球。他们到足球梦不一定能实现。
综合技能
你为什么认为你擅长这项工作
许多求职或升学时所填的表格都要求你写一段个人介绍。这种做法是很普遍的，常常要你写个人自述，或者回答特定的问题。你所回答的问题可能是：
你为什么认为你擅长这项工作？
你事业的目标是什么？
你有哪些特点表明你能在这个职业上取得成就？
解释你为什么要申请。
这是一次机会．你可能说服招聘人或教育工作者你能给他们的公司、组织或大学带来什么益处。从你的回答中他们决定是否对你感兴趣，留下好的印象很重要。我们向雇主询问怎样能有好的效果，他们说：
最重要的是要去调查研究。你要使读求职信的人信服，你明白公司或组织从事的一切，能清楚了解这件工作或程序。然后提供关于你的兴趣、资格、经验的有力证明，说明你有这些技能去做好工作。诚实谦虚，但不要有所保留。你擅长什么完全可以照实说。不要送去有错误的求职表，即使是你修改过的。表格应当清晰易读。
避免太简略，你的个人自述应当有趣、新颖。比如，一个想做导游的求职者说：“我喜欢与人相处，喜欢旅游。”这并不能给雇主什么新鲜感，提供什么信息。
篇6：3A Unit 9(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ listening ability .
2. Grasp the usage of the language points:
at the doctor’s , take a look,, knock into fell over
It feels a bit tense .
That sounds very interesting.
Difficulty: Ask the Ss to make a dialogue between the doctor and a patient.
Teaching methods: listening, speaking, practicing
Learning method: How to listen smartly
Teaching aids: tape recorder, some slides
Procedure:
Step 1. New words:
Step 2. Introduction
T: How many gold medals did the Chinese players win?
There are a lot of international champions in China in the Olympic Games.
The two of whom are gymnasts . Who are they ?
Ss: They are 李小鹏 and 刘璇 .
T: Li is an international champion on the double bars.
Liu is an international champion on the beam.
And also the whole Chinese gymnastic team have won the gold prize.
T: Today we are going to learn “ Gymnastics” .
Do you know what pieces of equipment are used in gymnastics ?
( Picture talking )
rings , beam, high bar, high-and-low bars, double bars, beam, “horse”(side horse / pummelled horse（鞍马） , vaulting horse（跳马）)
T: Do men and women , boys and girls do the same kinds of exercises?
------- Men perform on the rings, on the double bars, on the high bar, and on a type of “horse” with our legs which has two handles fixed to the top surface.
While women perform on the high-and-low bars, one of which is higher than the other, and the beam, which is a length of wood only four inches wide which is fixed at a height of 1.20 meters above the ground.
Step 3. Listening
Listen to the tape and choose the correct answers:
1. Sharon is a gymnast. She is ______.
A. at the teacher’s B. at the doctor’s C. at her friend’s D. at home
2. Something is wrong with Sharon’s ______.
A. left leg B. right shoulder C. left shoulder D. right leg
3. Sharon hurt herself when she was _____.
A. doing some exercises B. finishing some exercises
C. on the high-and-low bars D. jumping
4. The change between ___ temperatures makes the blood move and the damaged parts begin to repair themselves.
A. hot and cool B. warm and cool C. cold and cool D. hot and cold
5. At the end of the week, throw the frozen peas away. They _____ to eat.
A. will be fit B. won’t be fit C. would not like D. would like to
BCADB
Step 4. Read by themselves and answer the questions;
1. Who was Sharon? ---- gymnast
2. What’s wrong with her? ---- Something is wrong with her left shoulder.
3. How did she hurt her shoulder? ---- While she was doing gym.
4. What kind of treatment did the doctor advise her to use? ----- to use the hot-cloth-and-frozen-peas treatment.
5. How often does she have to take this treatment? ---- twice a day for a week
6. Do you think that this interesting treatment is effective? ----- Yes.
7. Have you ever used the hot-cloth-and-frozen peas treatment? ---------
What treatment does the doctor tell her to do?
---- To use the hot-cloth-and-frozen-pea treatment.
Step 4. Reading and find out the language points
1. at the doctor’s
at my uncle’s
at the tailor’s
2. take a look at : have a look at
3. It feels a bit tense.
4. knock into sb.
Can you knock the nail into the wall?
The boy ran for the ball and knocked into a man.
He walked in the dark and knocked into a tree.
5. fall over
He slipped into a banana skin and fell over.
6. so on and so on : repeatedly
7. That sounds very interesting.
8. fit to eat:
Step 5. Practice
Make up a dialogue between the two---- one is a doctor and the other is a patient
Doctor: Asks a question
Patient: Says what the problem is
Doctor: Makes one or more comments and then gives some advice
Example:
D: Can I help you?
P: Yes, I can’t sleep well.
D: How can I help you?
P: Can you give me some medicine so that I can have a good sleep?
D: What can I do for you?
P: I’ve got a pain here. My left shoulder hurts.
D: Let me have a look at it.
P: Oh, I feel terrible.
D: Mmn, I see. It feels a bit tense, but it’s nothing serious.
P: Shall I take any medicine?
D: Yes. Take this medicine, two pills a time, three times a day. And try to use the hot-cloth-and-frozen peas treatment.
Step 6. workbook----- Ex 2
Homework : read two passages
At the doctor’s
When a patient comes in what will the doctor say?
What can I do for you?
How can I help you?
What seems to be the matter?
Can I help you?
What will the patient say?
I’ve got a pain…
I’ve got a headache and a cough day and night.
I’ve got a temperature and all my bones ache.
I feel terrible.
I hurt my leg while I was….
I don’t feel well.
Then what will the doctor say?
Let me take a look at it / you.
Let me feel your pulse.
Left me take your temperature.
Oh, I see. It’s nothing serious.
Have a good rest and you’ll ..
You’ll be all right / well better soon.
Take this medicine / two pills a time, three times a day.
Unit 9 Lesson 34~35 Gymnastics
Aims and demands: Develop the Ss’ reading ability and have a good understanding of the text
Difficulty and importance: Have a deeper understanding of the text
Teaching methods: Reading and listening and discussion
Learning methods: How to read fast
Teaching aids: a tape recorder and some slide shown
Procedure:
Step 1. Presentation
What kinds of equipment are used in doing the gymnastic exercises?
As we know from the dialogue , Sharon hurt her left shoulder while doing some exercises on the high-and-low bars. So while you are doing gym, you should be more careful.
Now look at the pictures and tell :
Where are the gymnasts doing exercises / performing? ( P 51)
Ss: He is performing on the high bar.
He is performing on the double bars.
He is jumping / performing on a “horse”.
She is performing on a beam.
Step 2. Listening
Listen to the tape of Lesson 34 and tell whether the following statements are true or false.
1. Olympic competitions started in Greece. T
2. Modern gymnastics began in the 18th century. F
3. If you want to become a top gymnast, it is important to start when you are 14 or 15 years old.F
4. Boys win Olympic gymnastics medals usually between the age of 19 and 25. T
5. Both boys and girls perform on the rings, on the double bars, on the high bar and so on. F
6. Only girls perform on the high-and-low bars. T
7. Only boys do floor exercises on the mat. F
8. Make sure you put on some watches, rings, and necklaces before you start. F
9. Ww simple safety measures to follow while ( you are ) training.
8. Follow : a) to take or accept 遵守,采纳,听从
follow the safety measure
follow the teacher’s instructions
follow one’s advice
b) understand 领悟
You are speaking too fast and we can’t quite follow you.听懂
c) go along 沿..而行
Follow the path and you will see the cinema.
d) come or go after
She followed me into the classroom.
e) following can be used together with “the” , it means “next”
in the following year=== next year
9. …… can be highly dangerous
highly: to a high degree 高度的,非常的
eg: Advertising is a highly developed twentieth-century industry. 高度发达的
He is a highly skilled worker. 非常熟练的
固定词组:
Speak highly of 高度赞扬
Think highly of 高度评价
Sing high praise for 高度表扬
Hold one’s head high 头抬得高高地
1. be content to do sth. 满足干…… 满意做……
be content with sth. 对……满意
2. each used as an
They each have a computer on the desk.
Each of them has a computer on the desk.
3. in all
in a word 总之
all in all
4. glance at : look quickly at / give a quick at
5. be busy doing sth.
They are busy training in the gymnastic.
We had been bus preparing for the mid-term examination.
6. gain points 得分
gain mark 得分
win the medal 得奖牌
7. drills
The first thing …. . was to go up her trainer and thanked her.
句中两个作表语的不定式 go up to 和 thank her for 都省略了 to ,这是因为主语有定语从句 she did 来修饰的缘故.
一般地说,解释 do 的精确意思的分句,可以用不带 to 的动词不定式.
我们现在想做的就是躺下来休息.
What we want to do now is ( to ) lie down and rest.
我所做的就是推了他一下.
What I did was ( to ) give him a little push.
字典的作用是帮助学生查生字的词义和用法.
What a dictionary does is ( to) help the students to find out the meaning and the usage of new words.
Agreement.
Correct the mistakes if any. ( Lesson 34~35)
1. It was in Greece where the Olympic competition started. ( that )
2. It was in 1811 when an outdoor gymnastics center for men was opened in Berlin. (that)
3. There are also records of gymnastics performing in China. ( being performed/performed)
4. My bike is repairing . ( being repaired)
5. He didn’t mind leaving at home alone . ( being left )
6. Being lost can be a terrifying experience. (true )
7. Dance is an important part of training as it prepares they for the types of movements required in gymnastics. ( them )
8. The students are preparing the exam. ( add for )
9. In competitions women perform some of their exercises with music. ( to )
(We do eye exercises to music.)
10. Men usually gained Olympic gymnastics medals between 19 to 25. ( won, between…and)
11. The gymnasts should hold a position steady, keep their balances while doing a handstand. (balance)
(steady adj, adv. Steadily adv. )
12. Training by yourself in a gym can be high dangerous. (highly )
Highly : to a high degree
广告业是二十世纪高度发达的行业.
Advertising is a highly developed twentieth century industry.
他是个非常熟练的工人.
He is a highly skilled worker.
Speak highly of
Think highly of
Sing high praise for
Hold one’s head high
Replace the following underlined phrases with the phrases in L35.
13. She is satisfied with her present job.
be content with sth.
be content to do sth.
14. In a word , she gave a good performance and landed neatly and steadily. (In all / all in all)
15. She gave a quick look at the judge. ( glanced at )
16. What we want to do now is lie down and rest. ( true )
字典的作用是帮助学生查生字的词义和用法.
What a dictionary does is ( to) help the students to find out the meaning and the usage of new words.
Correct the mistakes if any. ( Lesson 34~35)
1. It was in Greece where the Olympic competition started.
2. It was in 1811 when an outdoor gymnastics center for men was opened in Berlin.
3. There are also records of gymnastics performing in China.
4. My bike is repairing .
5. He didn’t mind leaving at home alone .
6. Being lost can be a terrifying experience.
7. Dance is an important part of training as it prepares they for the types of movements required in gymnastics.
8. The students are preparing the exam.
9. In competitions women perform some of their exercises with music.
10. Men usually gained Olympic gymnastics medals between 19 to 25.
11. The gymnasts should hold a position steady, keep their balances while doing a handstand.
12. Training by yourself in a gym can be high dangerous.
Replace the following underlined phrases with the phrases in L35.
13. She is satisfied with her present job.
14. In a word , she gave a good performance and landed neatly and steadily.
15. She gave a quick look at the judge.
16. What we want to do now is lie down and rest. ( true or false ?)
Exercises for Unit 9 ---3A DCABB CBB
1. ___ him and then try to copy what he does. (99)
A. Mind B. Glance at C. Stare at D. Watch
2. The little boy runs for the football and ___ a man standing there.
A. knocks down B. knocks at
C. knocks into D. knocks
3. I cheered do loudly at the match that I completely ___ my voice.
A. lost B. missed C. forgot D. left
4. --- Do you think the Stars will beat the Bulls?
--- I don’t know. But this is the last time. The fans ___ them to win whole – heartedly.
A. hope B. require C. prefer D. demand
5. It was how the young man had learned five foreign languages ___ attracted the audience’s interest.
A. so that B. that C. what D. in which
6. It was for this reason __ her uncle moved out of New York and settled down in a small village. ( S)
A. which B. why C. that D. how
7. It is the ability to so the job ___ matters not where you come from or what you are. (2000)
A. one B. that C. what D. it
8. It was not ___ she took off here dark glasses ___ I realized she was a famous film star. (92)
A. when; that B. until; that
C. until; when D. when; then
Correct the mistakes: (for Unit 9 --- 3A )
It was Sunday and Zhou Lan was going 1.____
to take part in the first gymnastic compe-
tition. As soon as her competition started, 2.____
she tried her best and did good in per- 3.____
forming on three pieces of equipments 4.____
as well as on the floor. Now the time came
to her performance on the high -and-low 5.____
bars. She stands below them and waited. 6.____
When the judge nodding, she began . 7.____
She jumped upwards, caught the high bar
in two hands and did a neat circle . 8.____
Altogether,she performed wonderful and 9.____
landed nearly and steadily on the floor. Then
came the results. Victory for Zhou Lan!
She was the one. 10.____
1. true 2. her--- the 3. well 4. equipment 5. to – for 6. stood 7. nodded 8. in – with
9. wonderfully 10. first
篇7：Unit 6 经典教案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
Words and expressions
1. perseverance n. steady persistence in adhering to a course of action, a belief, or a purpose; steadfastness 毅力；坚持
Great works are performed, not by strength, but perseverance.
伟大的作品不是靠力量而是靠毅力来完成的。
2. quit
vt. to give up; abandon 放弃；to depart from; leave 离开；to cease or discontinue 停止；中断
He has not quit smoking, but is holding down to three cigarettes a day.
他并没有戒烟,但是已减到每天只抽三支烟了。
You and I are on the point of quitting the theater of our exploits.
你我正在离开我们辉煌业绩的舞台。
The teacher asked them to quit talking. 老师要求他们不要说话。
vi. to leave, to move, to stop
Time to quit. 该收手了。/该下班了。
3. apply (…) to … use; put into practice 应用；运用 n. application
We should apply theory to practice. 我们应当把理论运用到实践中去。
apply to 适用
What you have said doesn’t apply to this case.
apply for 申请
apply for a position/a patent
4. add up find the total of 总计；加起来
Add up 6,7 and 8 and you'll get 21. 把六、七、八相加，总数是二十一。
add up to 合计达
add to 增加
add … to 把…加到… add fuel to the fire 火上加油 add color to 增色
Add up all the numbers.
The cost of the party added up to 2,000 yuan.
The sudden rain added to our trouble.
Add some salt to the soup.
5. circumstance n. a condition or fact attending an event and having some bearing on it 环境；情况(常用复数形式)
Force of circumstances led us to give up our project. 环境的力量使得我们放弃了我们的方案。
It depends on [upon] circumstances. 这要视情况而定。
under/in no circumstances 决不，无论如何都不
under/in the circumstances 在这种情况下，既然这样
Under no circumstances should you step out of the house.
6. lose heart become discouraged 沮丧；灰心
Don't lose heart at any failure, but try again. 失败时不要灰心，要再接再厉。
lose one’s heart (to) sb. = fall in love with sb.
7. assessment n. the act of assessing; appraisal 评估；估价
environmental assessment 环境影响评估
vt. assess
1.) (为征税)估定(财产)的价值[(+at)]
The value of this property was assessed at one million dollars. 这财产的价值估定为一百万元。
2.) 确定(税、罚款、赔偿金等)的金额
assess damage after an accident 事故后确定损害赔偿金额
3.) 对...进行估价,评价
It is too early to assess the effects of the new legislation. 现在来评价新法规的效果为时尚早。
8. take it easy 放松些；别紧张
When the teacher found some of his students get nervous at the examination, he told them to take it easy. 老师发现一些学生考虑时焦急不安，就叫他们不要紧张。
归纳：take it 猜想, 以为；断定 take it for granted 视为当然
take it ill 见怪, 介意某事 take it or leave it 要么接受要么放弃
take it out on sb. 向某人出气 take it seriously 认真对待
9. keep up retain(one's spirits, strength, etc); (one's spirits, strength, etc.)not decline 维持；保持
The mountaineers' spirits kept up against heavy odds.
在非常不利的条件下，登山运动员们仍然情绪高涨。
归纳：keep up appearances 装门面 keep up one's spirits 振作精神
keep up to date 使记到最近时期；使跟上时代 keep up with 跟上
10. survival n. the act of surviving; continuance of life 幸存；存活
He stayed eight days in an open boat with no food, and he was still alive; his survival was a miracle. 他在无遮档的小船上呆了八天，又无食物，还活下来了，这真是个奇迹。
survive ①vi. 幸存，活下来 His parents died in the accident, but he survived.
②vt. 比…或活得长；经历…之后还存在 survive sb. / survive the fire
survivor n. 生还者, 残存物
11. beyond
prep. ①on the further or other side of 在较远的一边；在另一边 ②(of time)later than; more advanced than（时间）晚于；超过 ③out of the reach of; outside one\\'s understanding 为…不能及；超出…理解力之外 ④(negative and interrogative) except 除…之外
The post office is beyond the bridge. 邮局在桥的那一头。
Some shops keep open beyond midnight. 有些商店营业到半夜以后。
He was beyond the help of the teacher. 他使老师束手无策。
I know nothing beyond this. 除这之外，我什么也不知道。
adv. farther away 在远处 look beyond 向远处看
12. lose one’s way become lost 迷路；迷失
Lily lost her way in the woods. 莉莉在森林里迷了路。
feel one’s way fight one’s way make one’s way push one’s way wind one’s way
13. burden n. something that you carry; a heavy load 负担；包袱/a duty which is hard to do well 责任
It is a burden to the people. 这对人民是一种负担。
The burden fell on me. 责任落在我身上。
vt.
1.) 加重压于，加负担于，烦扰[(+with)]
The government burdened the nation with heavy taxes. 政府使国民负担重税。
2.) 加负荷于，使载重[(+with)]
He was burdened with a large bundle of magazines. 他吃力地捧着一大捆杂志。
14. desperate adj. having no hope and ready to do any wild or dangerous thing 绝望的；不顾一切的/ very serious 极严重的；危急的
The prisoners became desperate in their attempts to escape. 那些囚犯拼命企图逃亡。
The country is in a desperate state and we must work hard.
国家处于危急关头，我们应当努力工作。
15. accustomed adj. being in the habit of习惯[于…]的 [to doing]
I am not accustomed to walking long distances. 我不习惯于长距离的步行。
be accustomed to working/to work hard习惯于苦干
16. thirst n. [U] wanting to drink something; a strong desire 渴；渴望
I drank a cup of tea to relieve my thirst. 我喝了一杯茶止渴。
The artist thirsted for fame. 艺术家想出名。
17. starvation n. suffering or death caused by extreme hunger 挨饿；饿死
The cat died of starvation. 那只猫饿死了。
starve v. (cause to) suffer or die from great hunger 使挨饿，饿死/ (cause to) suffer from not having sth. 使得不到某物而痛苦
They lost in the desert and starved to death. 他们在沙漠迷路而饿死了。
The school is starved of resources. 学校缺乏财源。
18. anxiety n. [U] worry and fear 忧虑；担心；焦急 [C] something that makes you worried and afraid 担心的事；焦虑
We waited with anxiety for our examination results. 我们焦急地等待考试结果。
He has been relieved of his anxieties. 他已消除了忧虑（事）。
19. came to an end stop 结束；终止
All good things must come to an end. 一切好事迟早都会结束。（天下没有不散的宴席。）
at the end of 在...结尾,在....末端 in the end 最后，终于
bring to an end 使…结束 on end on end 竖着, 连续地
make an end of 终止，除掉 end (up) with 以――告终
put an end to 结束，终止 make ends meet 收支相抵
20. tax n. money that the government takes from your pay or from the sale of some goods 税
There is a large tax on cigarettes. 香烟的税很重。
pay taxes on sth. (taxpayers) 纳税 charge/impose/levy taxes on sth. 征税
v. 对…征税，向…课税 Imported wines are heavily imported in China.
21. anniversary n. the annually recurring date of a past event, especially one of historical, national, or personal importance 周年纪念；周年纪念日
a wedding anniversary the 20th anniversary of our country’s independence
22. relief n. ①the removal or ease of worry, pain ,etc. 解除；减轻
The medicine brought me relief. 这药减轻了我的痛苦。
Hearing the news, he breathed a sigh of relief. 一听到消息,他如释重负地松了口气。
②help given to people in poverty of trouble 救济
They are in need of relief. 他们需要救济。
Relief was flown to the flood-hit areas. 救济物品被空运到洪水泛滥区。
23. deliver vt. (delivery n.)
①take something to the place where it must go 投递；送交
Every day the milkman delivers milk to our house. 每天送牛奶的人都把牛奶送到我家。
②give forth in words 发言
He delivered a speech at the meeting. 他在会上讲了话。
③help in the birth of 接生
she delivered the child. 她接生了这孩子。
④save, set free, release 解救;解脱;释放[(+from)]
Education delivered him from ignorance. 教育把他从无知中解救出来。
24. Arctic adj. of the north polar regions 北极的
n. the regions round the north pole 北极；北极圈；北极地方
the Arctic Ocean 北冰洋 the Arctic Regions 北极地区
25. tough adj. able to withstand great strain without tearing or breaking; strong and resilient 坚韧的 demanding or troubling; difficult 困难的 physically hardy; rugged 强壮的 showing strong determination 强硬的，不妥协的
a tough guy 硬汉 tough meat 老肉 tough attitude 强硬的态度 a tough task 棘手的任务 a tough customer 难缠的顾客 a tough neighborhood 治安很差的住宅区
26. wrap vt. to cover completely with 包裹；缠绕
I wrapped the present in red paper. 我把礼物用红纸包了起来。
n. [C] an article of dress to be folded round a person 披在身上的衣物
Don't forget your wraps, when you travel in winter. 冬天旅游时，不要忘带外套、围巾等。
27. tie up put a piece of string, rope, etc. round something to hold it firm 捆；拴；系
I tied up the parcel. 我捆好包裹。
28. stake n. [C] strong post of wood or metal that stands in the ground 桩；柱桩
The farmer tied the bull to a stake in the field. 农民把公牛拴在田里的桩子上。
at stake: at risk; in question 在危急之中
29. ray n. line or beam of light, heat, etc. 光线；辐射线 v. 放射，射出光线
A ray of sunlight fell on the sleeping boy. 阳光照射着睡着的男孩。
This afternoon I will have my son x-rayed. 今天下午我带儿子去X光透视。
30. bark n. the short, sharp sound a dog makes; a sound like this, esp. a cough 吠声；似犬吠的声音 v. 吠, 咆哮, 剥树皮
The bark of a dog sounded in the night. 在夜间听到狗叫声。
Barking dogs seldom bark.
31. memorial n. [C] building or statue to remind people of someone or something 纪念馆；纪念碑（物） a memorial to people’s heroes
32. retell vt. tell again; repeat 重述；复述
retell what happened on the island one early morning in autumn.
复述一个秋天的清晨在那个岛上发生了什么。
33. go for to put a lot of effort into sth, so that you get or achieve sth. 为……去；努力获取
It sounds a great idea. Go for it. 这听起来是个极好的主意。努力去实现吧！
Reading
Step 1 Lead in
1. Talk about legendary journeys in China.
Journey to the West: The story is known in China. The hero Monk Tang in the story went through 81 difficulties. Finally he got the Buddhist Scripture.
The Long March: If there had not been the long march, we could not have lived the happy life. They went through starvation, coldness and so on.
Climbing Mount Qomolangma: They have to face difficulties like coldness, avalanche and snowstorm. It’s not only a personal achievement but also a pride for the whole nation.
2. China’s “Go West” policy.
3. The process of developing the west in America:
1748年 弗吉尼亚的俄亥俄州土地公司的组建（开始）。
1784，1785，1787 年制定三个土地法开发西部的纲领。
1895年 工业总产值跃居世界第一位
西部开发的三个阶段：
农业开发阶段（1750－1850） 工业开发阶段（1850－1950） 科技开发阶段 （1950－至今）
Step 2 Reading
1. Skimming
The main idea of the text:
The text related a story that the hero’s family and many other families moved to the West. They ran into many difficulties on the way to the West. Faced with the difficulties, they didn’t give up. Finally they got to the West and started a new life.
Part 1 (1) The cause and the beginning of the journey
Part 2 (2) The first destination of the journey
Part 3 (3-5) The most trying part of the journey
Part 4 (6) Reaching the promised land (The end of the journey)
2. Scanning
①When did we decide to move to another place? 1845,10
②How long did the journey last? About a year
③What is our first destination? India Greek in Kansas
④Is the journey hard? Can you make some examples about it?
Yes, it is hard. You can make many examples.
3. Detailed reading
Fill in the chart:
Time Events
October, 1845 set off for the journey
April ,1846 continued the journey westward
November, 1846 entered the desert and lost the way
For many weeks travel in the Death Valley
Christmas Day reached the promised land
Choose the best answers:
1. The reason why my father wanted to go to California is that . 答案：C
A. California was in desert B. California was far away
C. California was a wonderful land described in a book
D. California was the largest state in the USA
2. People moving to the west would meet in . 答案：A
A. Kansas B. California C. Salt Lake Valley D. Salt Lake Desert
3. On which day did the author enter the Salt Lake Desert? 答案：B
A. April 12. B. November 4. C. October 15. D. December 25.
4. Why did the travelers call their ninety-mile drive through the Salt Lake Desert the “Long Drive”? 答案：D
A. Because the landscape was dry and barren. B. Because water was salty and not drinkable.
C. Because their water supply was so low. D. All of the above.
5. After the travelers burnt their wagons, they had to go on their feet with another miles to go. 答案：B
A. 2 500 B.500 C.90 D.45
6. Why didn’t the author stay behind with the children and wait for help? 答案：A
A. Because that meant he/she would die.
B. Because he/she knew that children were tiresome.
C. Because he/she knew that there was a wagon waiting for him/her.
D. Because he/she felt he/she could get a prize by his/her father.
7. The animals almost ran when the travelers reached the edge of the desert, why? 答案：C
A. Because they were tired and weak. B. Because they had no burden.
C. Because they must have smelt the water. D. Because they went back to their home.
8. How long did the author spend finishing the journey? 答案：A
A. More than 40 months. B. About 2 months.
C. About a year. D. About a year and a month.
9. From the text, we can infer . 答案：D
A. the author and the travelers had to go all day and all night long
B. there was no oxen left when the travelers reached California
C. many travelers died when their days of hardship came to an end
D .it’s a long way to travel from the author’s hometown to California
10. The best title of the text is . 答案：B
A.A Journey to California B. Long Drive
C. The Salt Lake Desert D. Enjoy Your Life
3. Post-reading
1. What the writing techniques of this text are?
A. Use of the chronological order to narrate the story.
B. Use many participles to make the text readable and concise.
C. The landscape of the Salt Lake Valley sharply contrasts with that of the Salt Lake Desert. The scenery of the Salt Lake Valley is very beautiful, however, that of the Salt Lake Desert is dry and barren. Use the sharp contrastive scenery, expressing the hero’s optimism about the life he dreamed of in the West and coming across the difficulties on the way to the West.
2. What can we learn from this text?
When we come across problems, we shouldn’t try to escape. Instead , we should learn to face reality and solve the problems. As long as we overcome the difficulties and never give up, we will achieve our goals and succeed. More over, we all have dreams in our heart. As long as we insist and keep making great efforts, I believe we will make our dreams come true one day.
4. Consolidation
In the ______ of 1845, after his father read a book about _________, he decided to _____ there. His family and many other families ________ for their journey by the middle of October. After traveling through _________, they had to spend __________ in Kansas. Until ____________ , they wouldn’t leave. They traveled by day. On November4, 1846, they entered __________ and soon lost their way. Due to lack of ______________, the oxen had no strength to pull the wagons and were burnt. People had no choice but to cover another 500 miles ________. At last, they _________ all the difficulties and got to the west on the morning of _____________. They started their new life there.
Keys: spring, California, move, 4 states, the winter, April 12, 1846, the desert, water and grass, on foot, overcame, Christmas Day
Language points
1. believe in 信仰
2. stand for 代表，代替
3. adapt to 调节，适合
4. lose heart 灰心，泄气
5. be cast away (被)抛弃
6. give up 放弃 give in 投降，屈服，让步，交上
7. less than 少于;不足
more than 看似简单，含义丰富，主要用于以下情况：
（1）比…更（多、大等），用于比较结构。
He always asks more than he gives. 他总是索取多于给予。
（2）超过，多于，相当于over。
I have known David for more than 20 years. 我认识大卫20多年了。
（3）岂止是，不仅是； 非常， 十分
Can’t you sense the hidden meaning? It’s more than a joke.
难道你没听出言外之意吗？这不只是一个笑话。
more than happy/sorry 特高兴 / 特难过
（4）是…不能，非…能力所及，其后跟从句，从句中用can或could。
This is more than I can understand. 这是我所不能理解的。
归纳：more …than… 与其说…不如说， 不是…而是
He is more brave than wise. 他有勇无谋。
no more than 强调少，意为“只有，不过，仅仅”
not more than 客观叙述，意为“不超过”
He has no more than five dollars on him.
他身上仅有5美元。(强调少)
He has not more than five dollars on him.
他身上带的钱不超过(仅有)5美元。(强调数额少于5美元)
8. set off for 开始(旅程；赛跑)；出发
set off 出发、引爆
set about doing = set out to do
set aside 留出, 不顾, 取消, 驳回
set foot in/on
set fire to sth. =set sth. on fire
set in开始, 到来； 上涨；插入, 嵌入；开始,涨潮 / be set in 以…为背景
set up 设立, 竖立, 架起, 升起, 装配, 创(纪录), 提出, 开业
set an example to sb.
set back (set back the project 使受挫/ set my watch back 2 minutes往后拨)
9. move on 继续前进
10. by day 在白天
11. lose one’s way 迷路
12. most of the way 大部分路程
区别：most & most of 在most+名词结构中，名词是不定的，因此不能most the students, most us，而在most of +名词结构中，名词是指定的，它必须带有定冠词或物主代词等限定词。
12. hang out 伸出
13. in desperate need of 在极度需要的(时候)
14. on our feet = on foot 步行
15. be accustomed to doing sth. (通常用于被动语态)习惯于
16. suffer from 患病;遭受……之苦
17. hurry on to do sth. / (with) 赶紧办理;急急忙忙地去做某事
18. stop to do sth. 停下来去做某事
19. go on all fours 用四肢 lie one’s back/stomach
20. reach the edge of 达到了…的边缘 on the edge of 濒于, 几乎, 在边缘
21. stare at 瞪视; 凝视 glare at 瞪着，怒视
23. come to an end 结束;终止
Integrating Skills
1. the eightieth anniversary of sth. …80周年纪念日
2. a race against time 与时间赛跑，抢时间
3. save…from 挽救……免于
4. there was widespread relief 足以令人欣慰
5. Every minute counted/counts. 没分钟都非常关键。
6. up to 一直到,等于
7. at stake 在危险中；关系重大
8. the golden rays of the dawn 黎明的第一道曙光
9. a memorial to sb. / sth. 的纪念馆
10. risk one’s life to do/doing 冒险去做某事 risk doing
11. diseases of that kind 那样的病
12. a historical event 历史事件
篇8：高三英语Unit4-6教案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
Reading:
Warming up
Look at the pictures and match each flower with its correct name
Which flower is your favorite? Explain why.
Pre-reading
Why was Carl Linnaeus important to the history of botany as a science?
His system of grouping plants in families was unique, which based on the arrangement of the male and female organs in the flowers.
While-reading
Fast reading
How many people are mentioned in the passage?
Carl Linnaeus Daniel Solander Joseph Banks Captain Cook
Careful reading
1. Before Linnaeus botany was ________．D
A．studied by doctors B．unknown to anyone C．fully developed D．a branch of medicine
2. Some economic species plants such as____ could help to develop local economies．C
A．rose and peony B．tea and apple C．cocoa and hemp D．Cocoa and lemon
3. It was ____ who made Kew a centre of scientific and economic research．A
A．Joseph Banks B．Captain Cook C．Linnaeus D． Daniel Solander
4.Paragraph one of the text mainly tells us ___ ．C
A．the importance of botany B．how to classify plant species into groups
C．Linnaeus’contribution to botany D．Linnaeus’discoveries about different species
5.Captain Cook made ___voyages altogether around the world. C
A．one B．Two C．Three D.four
Post-reading
1. How did scientists classify plants before Linnaeus?
Some scientists classified plants into herbs and trees, or according to the shape of the fruit, or whether they had flowers or not.
2. What were the goals of James Cook’s first voyage around the world?
To study the passing of the planet Venus across the sun; to record, classify and describe all plant and animal life observed during the trip; to search for an unknown southern continent.
3. Why did Joseph Banks have to supply his own money to equip part of the expedition?
Because the government would not pay for such a new field of science as botany.
4. What could be a possible explanation for the name “strawberry”?
When people plant strawberry, they spread straw under the fruit to reduce the necessary amount of watering.
Integrating skills
Scanning
Find out the important people mentioned in the text.
Charles Darwin From England Gregor Mendel From Austria
Gote Turesson From Sweden
Choose the best answers according to the passage
1. The research by Darwin, Mendel and Turesson shows that_ . C
A. genetics is more important than the environment to plants
B. genetics is less important than the environment to plants
C. both genetics and the environment are important to plants
D. neither genetics nor the environment is important to plants
2. Darwin observed that the birds with _ _ would eat_ . B
A. small beaks l hard seeds B．broad beaks；hard seeds
C. hard beaks；hard seeds D．broad beaks；soft seeds
3.Darwin joined the scientific expedition on _____ ． C
A. the Endeavour B.Tahiti C．the Beagle D．space
4. Scientists of the nineteenth century believed that . D
A．the development of new species was behind the influence of the environment
B．the development of new species and the influence of the environment were hand in hand
C．the development of new species had nothing to do with the influence of the environment
D the influence of the environment was behind the development of new species .
5. Darwin studied physics，chemistry and botany because_________ . B
A．he was invited to join scientific expedition
B．he was interested in them
C．he could do a lot Of experiments
D．he wanted to finish his book“On the Origin of Species”
Fill in the following blanks
Scientist
Research/experiment
Result
Charles Darwin
The wild life of Galapagos, many varieties of garden roses
There were differences between the species of the different islands’yet all showed a clear relationship with those of America’ differences in habitat could lead to different species in birds as well as in plants.
Gregor Mendel
Flowers and peas
Many characteristics were passed on from one generation to the next, without influence by the environment. His research gave birth to the science of genetics.
Gote Turesson
A wild plant found on the Swedish west coast
Found evidence for the existence of stable varieties within species in nature. He showed that differences between plants of one species occurred as a result of the environmental conditions in their habitat.
The text can be divided into four parts
Part I Pa1-3: Darwin and his research.
Part II Pa4-5: Mendel and his experiment.
Part III Pa6: Turesson and his study
Part IV Pa7: the importance and significance of the research of the three.
Important sentences in the passage
1. It was Darwin’s visit on the Beagle to the Galapagos Isles that gave him the key to his new theory.
2. Back home, in England, Darwin realized that differences in habitat could lead to different species in birds as well as in plants.
3. As a result of Darwin and Mendel’s research, scientists of the nineteenth century formed the belief that that influence of the environment was behind the development of new species.
4. It would take a next generation of scientists to bring the importance of the environment on species back in view.
Translate the following phrases into English:
详细地 in detail 处于支配的地位，负责 in charge of
由……负责 in the charge of 任命某人为……appoint sb. as
将……分类成classify…into… 计算……之间的距离 calculate the distance between…
一代一代传下去pass on from one generation to the next 建于…；以…为基础be based on
参与; 陷入 ……的活动be involved in 根据;视……而定；按照according to
搜索；寻找 search for 总而言之 altogether
match…with （在品质；颜色；设计等方面）相等，相当，相配
at the age of 在……岁时 look out for 警惕;留心;守侯
on a large scale 大规模地;大范围地 year after year 年年;年复一年
pass away 逝世 name…after 给……取名;命名
take care of 关心;照顾 classify…into 分类;归类
develop a lifelong friendship with 与……结存了终生好朋友 born into 出生
have an appetite for knowledge 有求知欲 a great deal of 大量;许多(用于不可数名词)
lie in 在于 related to 与……有关
the key to 关键是(在于) adapt to 适应于
be sunken into 堕入 a bunch of flowers
at first sight lead a cosy life
make two more voyages be involved in
lead sb. to do sth. calculate the distance between
pass on from on generation to the next form the belief
in view adapt to the new environment
Unit 5 Getting the message
Reading:
Look at the pictures on page37 and fill in the chart
Items
Ad 1
Ad 2
Ad 3
The products they persuade you to buy
Advanced electronic roducts
Shampoo
Soft drinks
How to persuade
By using abstract design, slogan and pictures
By using wonderful pictures ,slogan and realistic products
By using wonderful pictures, slogan and products
The message each ad gives
High quality,
Help customers to succeed
Create beauty,bring happiness and love to customers
Help athletes to refresh themselves.
How is the information conveyed
Pictures, slogan, spokesman
Products,slogan, pictures
Pictures,slogan, products
Words related to advertising
advertise, advertisement advertiser, brand, post, spokesman, spokeswoman, designer, entertain, promote, customer, slogan, text, writer mislead, humorous, persuasive, broadcast, annoy, appeal to
Pre-reading
Collect advantages and disadvantages of advertisements from the students
Advantages Disadvantages
Provide information Mislead customers
Increase sales Give false or incorrect information
Make the public aware of social problem Raise the price of products
…
1.the first form of advertising : in Greece and Egypt around 1500 B.C.
2.the first printed advertisement: in London 1477
3.the first commercials on radio: about 1920
4.the first commercial on TV: after World War 2
Reading Find out the main idea for each paragraph
Pa1: Ads are found almost everywhere
Pa2: People react to advertisements in different ways.
Pa3: The basic principle of advertisements is to influence customers’ choices.
Pa4: Ads help companies and customers n a variety of ways.
Pa5: the most important function of advertising is to introduce new products.
Pa6: Governments and other organizations use ads to make people aware of government policies and social problems.
Pa7: Customers should be careful of illegal ads.
Pa8: Customers should learn to protect themselves from false ads and make smart choices.
Answer the following questions
Fast reading
1.What is people’s reaction to ads.? P2
2.What is the basic principle of advertising? P3
3.What is the most important function of ads? P5
4.what’s the advantage of good ads? P8
Careful reading
1.Why is advertising popular?
2.How does advertising help consumers and companies?
3.What is the basic principle behind advertisements?
4.Why do advertisers often have to work hard to attract people’s attention?
5.What is a “bait-and-switch” a?
6.How can we protect ourselves from misleading ads?
Choose the best answers:
1.The word “advertising” means to make a product known to . D
A managers through broadcast B leaders by radios
C firms by printed notices D people in various ways.
2.One advantage of advertising is that it helps . A
A increase product sales B make a product more expensive
C increase production D reduce the costs of a product
3.Advertising is a highly developed . B
A information B industry C trade D science
4.The development of radio, television, cinema, magazines and newspapers has with the development of advertising. B
A followed up B gone hand in hand C gone behind D taken place
5. The best chance to reach customers is to . C
A sell them the product B sell them what money can not buy: love, happiness and success.
C appeal to their emotions D reduce the price of the products.
6．The development of media has gone hand hand the development of advertising. C
A. by; by B. by; with C. in; with D. in; by
8.People react to advertisements in different ways.Because . 答案：A
A. ads are useful and entertaining to some people while annoying to others
B. ads are useful and entertaining C. ads are annoying
D.ads are not only useful and entertaining but annoying
9.When we buy an expensive product, can help us make the right decision. 答案：B
A. sellers B. ads C. our friends D. defenders
10.“Not all ads are used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits” means . 答案：D
A. all ads are used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits
B. few ads are used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits
C. no ads are used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits
D. all ads are not used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits
11.In order not to become easy target for ad makers, we must . 答案：A
A. distinguish between fiction and facts B. watch TV more often
C. believe all the ads D. never believe any ads
12.The best chance to reach customers for the advertisers is to . 答案：A
A. appeal to their emotions B. make interesting pictures
C. give customers proper prices D. send messages to customers
13.Paragraph 4 is mainly about . 答案：C
A. ads must increase the production B. ads must reduce the price of the production
C. ads must help companies and customers D. ads must make a product more expensive
14.Which sentence tells us the main idea of Paragraph 5? 答案：C
A. The most important function of advertising is to introduce the prices of the products.
B. The most important function of advertising is to introduce the types of the products.
C. The most important function of advertising is to introduce new products.
D. The most important function of advertising is to introduce the company where the products come from.
15.Why is advertising popular? 答案：C
A. Because ads are found in newspapers. B. Because ads are found on the Internet.
C. Because ads are found on TV. D. Because ads are found everywhere.
16.We can infer from the last sentence of the text that . 答案：C
A. we must learn to believe ads B. we must learn to accept ads
C. we must learn to analyse ads D. we must learn to accuse ads
T or F
1.People react to advertisements in different ways.( )
2.The basic principle of advertising is fairly difficult.( )
3.Since an increase in sales means an increase in production, the price may be increased, too. ( )
4.Truthful ads provide good information that helps customers to decide whether they want or need the advertised product.( )
5.Perhaps the most important function of advertising is to increase a company’s profits. ( )
6.By using the techniques developed by the advertising industry, governments and other non-profit organizations can spread knowledge, change attitudes and improve society.( )
7.All ads are not used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits.( )
Difficult sentences
1.The development of radio ,television and other media has gone hand in hand with the development.
2.Customers see so many ads every day that advertisers must work hard to get their message across.
3.The best chance to reach customers is to appeal to their emotions.
4.First of all ,we should always keep an eye out for “hidden information”.
Integrating skills
Fill in the blanks for the revision
Advertising is a highly developed industry. It has gone hand in hand with radio, television and other media.
People react to ads in different ways. Some think ads are useful and help consumers
make informed choices while others accuse companies of using ads to mislead us. Companies can influence customers’ choices by introducing a brand name and by associating products with customers’ needs. There are so many ads for customers that advertisers must try to get their message across by appealing to their emotions.
Ads help companies and customers in all kinds of ways. They can help companies increase sales . At the same time , they help customers choose among all the available products. In fact, truthful ads provide good information,and help customers compare feathers, functions and costs. Some governments name a famous person as their spokesman or spokeswoman to make people aware
of their social problems and policies.
Customers should protect themselves by keeping an eye out for bad ads, telling false information from real facts and making good choices.
II Lead-in
1 what product do they persuade you to buy?
2 what information about product can you get?
3 How is the information conveyed?
4 What are the skills of making good ads?
III Reading
1 How do the ad-makers create a positive image of the product they are promoting?
2 How do ad-makers choose a name for the product?
3 What kind of slogans should be used to make the consumers to form a positive image? Can you give an example?
4 How are the ads presented ?
How to create a positive image of the product
Choose the words and brand names A good slogan
1 tell the consumer about 1 should be catchy
the advantages of the product 2 easy to remember
2 choose a funny name 3 convey a message
3 use a well-known word
4 choose names from old stories
5 invent a new word
Ads are started with a puzzle or question
And presented in a humorous way
in order to 为的是;目的在于 take …into consideration 考虑某事物
compare…with…把……与……比较(对比) complain about 对某人与某物抱怨
in charge of… 负责;处于控制或支配的地位 hand in hand 手拉手;密切关联的
with the develop of 随着……发展 on the other hand 另一方面
get… across 传播或为人理解 instead of 代替(后面接名词代词动名词或介词短语)
appeal to 呼吁;上诉;投合(兴趣或心愿) armed with用…… 做准备;备有
make sb. aware of 使人明白;觉察;意识到 keep an eye out for留心或注意到某人或某事物
protect…from… 防护而不受 at the right time 在恰当的时候
point out to (向某人)指出;使注意 make sense 有意义;有道理;讲得通
accuse…of… 指责;控告 attach to 系;贴;固定;附着
differ from 不同于 attach importance to 给予重视
start with 以 开始 with the purpose of 以 为目的
point out 指出 refer to 指/参考
think twice 慎重考虑 large amounts of money
make good choices out of ten
take a critical attitude towards advertisements with the purpose of
a series of at a loss
profit by / from
Unit 6
Reading
Lead-in and Pre-reading
1． Who the Native Americans were? Where did they live and what do you know about their life?
The Native Americans were the Indian. They lived in the vast land of West America and their life was simple and hard. They hunt for food and rode on horses.
2. History counts many cases in which settlers moved into areas that belonged to other people. Can you give some examples? What happened?
The American continents were peopled as a result of two long-continuing immigration movements, the first from Asia, and the second from Europe and Africa. The first movement began probably 25, 000 years ago when Siberian tribes, in search of new hunting grounds or of refuge from pursuing enemies, crossed over the Bering Strait to Alaska. By 1492, over 10-20 million people, mistakenly called Indians by Christopher Columbus, inhabited the Americans. They developed their own aboriginal cultures, which ranged from the simple to the complex, from those of the primitive tribes to the brilliant civilizations of the Aztecs, the Incas and the Mayas. The second migration to the Americas began with the expansion of Europe at the start of the modern period from the 16th century.
3. The new settlements in America soon became known as the Wild West. Why?
Because the western states of the US during the years were settled by the first Europeans. There was not much respect for the law there.
Read the text then answer some questions.
1 When did we decide to move to another place? 1845,10
2 How long did the journey last? About a year
3 What is our first destination? India Greek in Kansas
4．What does “account” in the first line means?
The “account” here means description. For example, “She gave the police a full account of the incident.”
5. In paragraph two, the author mentioned Indian Greek. Where was it and was it very important?
It was in Kansas. It was the frontier at that time and also the meeting place for people moving to the west.
6. Do you know what difficulties they ran into during the journey?
They entered the desert and lost their way, and didn’t have enough water to drink. Their animals died from lack of water.
7. According to the fourth paragraph, why do people call the desert Death Valley?
People showed coldness and were not willing to help others in trouble. They abandoned everything they could. Valley is in chaos and full of dead animals. Therefore, we called it Death Valley.
8. Is the journey hard? Can you make some examples about it?
Yes, it is hard. You can make many examples.
9. What is the theme of this passage?
If you make unremitting efforts, you will achieve your goals. Don’t give up before difficulties.
Listening
Listen to the tape carefully then do these exercises.
Post-reading
Exercise1. True or False
1 We traveled alone. (F with many other families)
2．When a young man in our group suggested that I stay behind with the children and wait for help, I agreed. (F I didn’t agree.)
3. When the animals smelt the water, they all ran.
Exercise 2
Choose the best answers
1.The reason why my father wanted to go to California is that . 答案：C
A. California was in desert B. California was far away
C. California was a wonderful land described in a book
D. California was the largest state in the USA
2.People moving to the west would meet in . 答案：A
A. Kansas B. California C. Salt Lake Valley D. Salt Lake Desert
3.On which day did the author enter the Salt Lake Desert? 答案：B
A. April 12. B. November 4. C. October 15. D. December 25.
4.Why did the travelers call their ninety-mile drive through the Salt Lake Desert the “Long Drive”? 答案：D
A Because the landscape was dry and barren. B. Because water was salty and not drinkable.
C. Because their water supply was so low. D. All of the above.
5.After the travelers burnt their wagons, they had to go on their feet with another miles to go. B
A.2 500 B.500 C.90 D.45
6.Why didn’t the author stay behind with the children and wait for help? A
A. Because that meant he/she would die.
B. Because he/she knew that children were tiresome.
C. Because he/she knew that there was a wagon waiting for him/her.
D. Because he/she felt he/she could get a prize by his/her father.
7.The animals almost ran when the travelers reached the edge of the desert, why? 答案：C
A. Because they were tired and weak. B. Because they had no burden.
C. Because they must have smelt the water. D. Because they went back to their home.
8.How long did the author spend finishing the journey? 答案：A
A. More than 40 months. B. About 2 months.
C. About a year. D. About a year and a month.
9.From the text, we can infer . 答案：D
A. the author and the travelers had to go all day and all night long
B. there was no oxen left when the travelers reached California
C. many travelers died when their days of hardship came to an end
D .it’s a long way to travel from the author’s hometown to California
10.The best title of the text is . 答案：B
A.A Journey To California B. Long Drive
C. The Salt Lake Desert D. Enjoy Your Life
Questions:
1 Where in the text do you find evidence that the wagons were not he most suitable means of transport? You can find your answers in paragraph 3.
2 Why did the travelers call their ninety mile-drive through the Salt Lake Desert the “long drive”?
We had to travel long without water or grass for the animals to eat. It was hard.
3 What can you learn from this reading passage? What impresses you most?
1)After suffering from many difficulties, we can live a better life. Facing the hardship, never give up, etc.
2)The courage of the people impresses me most.
Passage analysis
1. What the writing techniques of this text are?
A. Use of the chronological order to narrate the story.
B. Use many participles to make the text readable and concise.
C. The landscape of the Salt Lake Valley sharply contrasts with that of the Salt Lake Desert. The scenery of the Salt Lake Valley is very beautiful, however, that of the Salt Lake Desert is dry and barren. Use the sharp contrastive scenery, expressing the hero’s optimism about the life that he dreamed of in the West and coming across the difficulties on the way to the West.
2. What is the writing style of the text?
The text is a narrative writing, which related a story that the hero’s family and other many families moved to the West. They ran into many difficulties on the way to the West. Finally they got to the West and started a new life. The text, which uses the first person to relate the hero’s true experiences, gives us a vivid description.
3.What is the main idea of the text?
The text related a story that the hero’s family and other many families moving to the West. They ran into many difficulties on the way to the West. Finally they got to the West and started a new life. When they came across the problems, they didn’t escape them. However, they faced reality and solved the problems. They insisted on and made unremitting efforts, so they made their dream come true. Moreover, An iron pestle can be ground down to a needle - perseverance will prevail.
4. What’s the purpose of the writer?
The writer wanted to tell us “When one comes across the problems, one shouldn’t escape them. However, he should learn to face reality and solve the problems. As long as he overcomes the difficulties and never gives up, he will achieve his goals and succeed. Moreover, he has dreams in his heart. As long as he insists on and makes unremitting efforts, I believe he will make his dreams come true some day. In fact, life itself is a battle. Natural environment and nature are your enemies. If you defeat them, you can live in the world, or it is death that is waiting for you.”
5. What can we learn from this text?
We learned that during our lifetime, we may run into many difficulties. When we come across the problems, we shouldn’t try to escape. Instead, we should learn to face reality and solve the problems. As long as we overcome the difficulties and never give up, we will achieve our goals and succeed. Moreover, we all have dreams in our heart. As long as we insist on and make unremitting efforts, we will make our dreams come true one day.
Integrating skills
Lead-in
What did he describe in the novel The Call of Wild by Jack London? And where did the story happen?
This story happened in Alaska, a far and cold land. It described the life of a dog named Buck as well as other dogs’ encounter.
Reading
1. Who do you think the three persons are? What are they talking about?
I think Mr. Rivers is the host of a program. I guess Mr. Parks is a historian or something else. Ms. Welch is the granddaughter of Dr Welch. And Dr Welch was a doctor of a small city called Nome.
2. Where did the story happen? And what happened to the children?
The story happened in a small city called Nome. Some children in the city had a terrible disease and they would die if they couldn’t get enough vaccine.
3. Where could they get the vaccine that would save the children?
A hospital in Anchorage had a good supply of vaccine. It was far away from Nome.
4. What difficulties did they meet on the way and how did they overcome them?
They faced many difficulties. First, the time was limited. The children would die if their treatment was delayed too long. Second, at that time, the sea was frozen and the only two planes had been stored, nothing got to Nome quickly. Third, The Arctic winter was very cold and there were terrible storms.
Difficulties with the medicine delivery
Their attitudes and solutions
Traffic problems: The sea frozen; the only two planes stored; no quick traffic
A train took the medicine from Anchorage to Nenana; A relay of dog teams between Nenana and Nome
Snow storms and low temperature
Kept going without stop
Time limitation
Covered almost 700 miles in little more than 127 hours
Post-reading
Questions on P53 and P54.
Suggested answers:
1. Flu and diphtheria
2. As we all know, SARS spread through the world in . SARS is short for Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome.
3. Dr Welch could save the children if he could get enough vaccine as quickly as possible.
4. Relay is an act of passing something along from one person, group, or station to another. We have relay race in sports, and torch relay.
5. A relay of dog sleds was chosen as the best transportation because in 1925, nothing got to Nome quickly, the sea was frozen, and the only two planes had been stored.
Phrases
believe in 信任;信耐 stand for 代表;代替
adapt to 适宜 lose heart 灰心;泄气
be cast away (被)抛弃 give up 放弃
less than 少于;不足 set off for 开始(旅程;赛跑);出发
move on 继续前进 take the way 出发;首途
lose one’s way 迷路 hang out 伸出
in desperate need of 在极度需要的(时候) on our feet=on foot 步行
be accustomed to doing sth. (通常用于被动语态)习惯于 suffer from 患病;遭受……之苦
hurry on to (with) 赶紧办理;急急忙忙地去做某事 stop to do sth.停下来去做某事
start doing sth. 开始做某事 go on all fours 用四肢
(at)the edge of of (在)……边缘 stare at 瞪视; 凝视
come to an end 结束;终止 a race against time 与时间赛跑
save…from 挽救……免于 take up to 占用(时间;空间)
at stake 在危险中;关系重大 risk one’s life to 冒险去做某事
apply…to… 运用;应用 add up (两个或两个以上的数量或量)加起来
take it easy 别紧张;放松点 keep up 维持;保持;使某事处于高水平
common sense 常识;情理 leave behind 忘带;留下
live through sth. 经历某事物而幸存 tie up 系;拴;捆
go for 为……去;努力获取 be more of a leader than a follower
be honest with by day / by night
pass through be on one’s feet
be accustomed to in anxiety of
reach the promised land come to an end
a relay of dog teams take up to 13 days
篇9：Unit 14 Festivals(人教版八年级英语上册教案教学设计)
Teaching aims:
(1) Learn to use functional sentences, key structures, and words.
(2) To know something about the festivals of different countries and try to express their ideas about them by listening, speaking, reading and writing.
Teaching contents:
1. Topic: Festivals.
Talking about festivals and customs.
2. Functional Sentences: Expressing and supporting an opinion.
(1) In my opinion, we should….
(2) I believe we should…
(3) I don’t think it’s necessary to…
(4) We must decide…
(5) I hope we can make a decision…
(6) If we do this, we can…
(7) I think that…should…
3. Vocabulary:
(1) Words: theme parade holy Easter symbol conflict argument opinion major probably honour ancestor principle nation purpose creativity faith commercial joy light similar generation salute kiss cheek nod celebration respect gift cycle fool invitation.
(2) Phrases: dress up in one’s opinion play a trick on sb. take in
4. Grammar: modal words--- must, have to and have got to
Period 1 Warming up and listening
Teaching aims:
1. To get students to know something about festivals, customs and habits.
2. To train students listening ability for catching specific information.
Teaching aids: multimedia, recorder, and tape.
Teaching procedures:
Step1 Pre-task (Warming up)
Look at the pictures of these festivals on page 8 and answer the questions:
(1) Do you know the Chinese names of the festivals?
(2) Do you know which countries the festivals come from?
(3) What are the people in the pictures doing? Why are they doing this?
If students can answer these questions, that’s OK. If not, ask the students to read the following description and match.
On October 31st westerners celebrate Halloween which children like best, because they can enjoy themselves on that day. When night comes, they wear all kinds of strange costumes and masks as bad men, witches, ghosts or goblins, then they ask for candies from door to door, shouting: “Treat or Trick? Happy Halloween…”
The Day of the Dead is an ancient festival celebrated in Mexico. The festival honors both the living and the dead. On this day, people light candles for prayers to the dead and give sugar skeletons to each other as gifts. It is not a sad day, but rather a time to celebrate the cycle of life.
Obon is an ancient festival celebrated in Japan. The Japanese float paper lanterns in memory of the dead.
Step2 While task (Listening comprehension)
(1) Before listening, ask the students to have a competition to match the festivals with the given information.
1. Mardi Gras A. It’s much like Halloween in the US.
2. Ramadan B. People celebrating the festival will not eat or smoke.
3. Easter C. The name of the festival is “Fat Tuesday”.
(2) Martin Gras
1. Go through the three items with the students and make sure what to listen before the teacher plays the tape.
2. Play the tape for 3-4 times and finish the multiple choice.
3. Let students check their answers in pairs and then with the whole class.
(3) The teaching procedure of Ramadan and Easter: the same as Martin Gras
Step3 Post task (Comparative study of Chinese and foreign festivals)
1. Show some pictures about the Chinese festivals to the students and have them try to identify the festival. Whether they can identify the festival or not, ask them to read the short description in English and share it with class.
(1) The Spring Festival
The Spring Festival is celebrated on the 30th day of the 12th lunar month. It’s an ancient Chinese festival and it is the most important one for Chinese. On that day, people will get together to have a reunion dinner on Chinese New Year’s Eve no matter how far he is. And children often get new clothes and money from their parents or relatives
(2) The Dragon Boat Festival
Chinese celebrate the memory of a great poet Qu Yuan on the 5th day of the 5th lunar month. On this day, the people eat some pyramid-shaped dumplings which are made of glutinous rice wrapped in bamboo or reed leaves and they often have a dragon boat race and throw some pyramid-shaped dumplings into the Yangzi River so that the fish or animals in it wouldn’t eat Qu Yuan.
2. Brainstorm: How many foreign and Chinese festivals do you know through today’s study? Can you compare them in details? Please work in pairs and compare a Chinese festival with one from another country.
A Chinese festival A foreign festival
The name of the festival
When is the festival celebrated?
Who celebrates the festival?
How do people celebrate it?
Why do people celebrate it?
What are some important themes, for example “family” and “peace”?
How old is the festival?
Step4 Homework:
Task: Comparative study of Chinese and foreign festivals.
Period 2 Speaking
Teaching aims:
1. To train students’ speaking ability through practicing their expressing and supporting an opinion.
2. To train students’ creative ability.
Teaching procedures:
Step1 Pre-task (Leading in)
1. Instruction: This class we will learn four new holidays, which new holiday do you like best and why? Please read and decide what a new holiday should be about.
2.Ask the students to read the message about the four new holidays on page 10 and decide what a new holiday should be about.
Step2 While task
1. Brainstorm: Ask the students to try to remember festivals as many as possible.
Instruction: What foreign festivals did we learn from last class? How about Chinese festivals? Among the foreign and Chinese festivals and four new festivals, which one do you like best and why?
2. Activity: Before the students tell their partners which one they like best, ask the students to write down their favourite festival and then have a game according to the instructions on page 30 of the teachers’ book.
3. Instruction: Then I’ll show you how Tom thinks. (Show the sample to the class) What sentences can express and support an opinion in English? Let’s see the useful expressions on page 10.
4. Ask the students to read the useful expressions.
5. Instruction: Please discuss in group of four and tell your group members why your holiday is the best one or why you like it best. (Then have students discuss in groups.)
6. Ask some groups to report in class.
Step3 Post task
(1) Ask the class to finish the following task.
Task: Create a new festival or holiday.
When would you celebrate it? Why would you celebrate it? How would you celebrate it? What theme would you use?
1.Name of the festival (holiday):
2.Date:
3.Meaning:
4.Themes:
5.How is the festival celebrated?
6. What is the symbol of the festival?
Ask the students to discuss and then ask some groups to tell the class why their festival or holiday is the best one.
(2) Divide the class into three groups and each group finish one of the following three tasks.
Situation1: Create a class festival
1. Show the key words to the students: honor, purpose, faith, respect, fix, on the day, in honor of, sing high praise for, in memory of…
2. Show the functional sentences to them.
1) Fix the festival on that day in memory of…
2) Celebrate the festival by…
3)Do this to play respect to…
Situation2: Work in groups. Imagine that you and three of your classmates are going to celebrate a festival. Please decide
1.when you will celebrate the celebrate
2. what you will do
3.where you will celebrate
4.what you will buy
5.what guests you will invite ……
Situation3: Work in groups. Imagine that you and three of your classmates are going to spend a holiday together. Please decide where you will go and what you will do.
*Show the functional sentences to them:
1. I think that we should go to the park and have a picnic because…
2. I think that the best way to celebrate is to have dinner at a restaurant and then go
to a karaoke bar because…
3. I think we should go on a trip to …and …because…
4. I think we should…
Step4 Homework
Project work: Work in group of four to create a new festival or holiday.
Period 3 Reading
Teaching aims:
1. Let students know about the history and culture of the festival.
2. Ask students to understand and respect other countries’ costumes.
3. To train students’ reading ability.
Teaching procedures:
Part I--------Pre-reading.
I. Task : Ask students to search the information about the Spring Festival in groups before the class:
II. Show students some pictures of festivals of China and other countries and ask them to guess what festivals they are.
Part II-------.While-reading
Step 1: I. Show students some pictures of Kwanzaa and ask them if they know this festival.
Show the word “ Kwanzaa” on the blackboard.
II.. Ask students what they want to know if they come across a new festival.
Ask students ideas then write their questions on the blackboard.
What…
When…
Who…
Why…
How…
(T: So today we are going to read an article, then you will get the answer)
Step 2. Ask students to read the passage as quickly as possible and then answer the following questions:
1. What is Kwanzaa?
2. When is the festival celebrated?
3. Who celebrate it?
Step 3. . Listen and read for the detailed information and finish True or False statements.
( 可参考目标练习册)
1. Kwanzaa is a very old festival. ( F)
2. People celebrate Kwanzaa from December 25 to January 1. (F)
3. The word Kwanzaa means first fruit in Swahili. ( T)
4. Kwanzaa is celebrated by all the Americans. (F)
5. Many things of the African first-fruit are the same. (T)
6. People celebrate it by lighting seven candles each day and discussing one of the seven principles of Kwanzaa. (F)
7. The holidays and festivals help us understand who we are, remember where we come from, and share our hopes for a happy future. (T)
Step 4. Dealing with difficulties in understanding the words and sentences.
I Ask students to read the text with the tape on and find out some difficulties in understanding the text.
II . Help students understand the following words and match them.
unity make decisions by oneself
nation strengthen , help (sth. sb.) to continue
self-determination country
support harmony(和睦), arrangement of aims of feelings
purpose that which one means to do.
creativity trust; strong belief; confidence
faith the ability of creating or making things.
III. Help students understand some long sentences:
1. Kwanzaa was born in 1966, when people created a new festival so that African Americans would be able to celebrate their history and culture.
Q: (1) When did African Americans create the new festival?
(2) Why did they create the new festival?
( If students still can’t understand, help them to translate it into Chinese.)
2. The festivals were a way to celebrate history and culture, as well as the new year.
Q: (1) Which festival, only Kwanzaa or all the first-fruit festivals?
(2) What do the festivals celebrate?
( If students still can’t understand, help them to translate it into Chinese.)
3. Since Kwanzaa is a time for learning as well as joy, people celebrate it by lighting a candle each day and discussing one of the seven principles of Kwanzaa.
Q: (1) Is Kwanzaa a time for joy? Is it a time for learning?
(2) What does ‘since’ mean here?
(3) What do people do in Kwanzaa?
( If students still can’t understand, help them to translate it into Chinese.)
IV. Ask students to discuss two questions.
1. How did this festival come about ?
2. How to celebrate it?
( Give students some candles and other things. Ask them to act how to celebrate it. During the action, teacher can help students understand the principles.)
Part III. Post-reading
Step 1. Ask students to discuss one question:
What’s the meaning of creating a new festival?
Step 2.
task1: Ask students to fill in the form according to the text and the information they have got about the Spring Festival.
Name of the festival The Spring Festival Kwanzaa
When is the festival
Who celebrate it
Why do people create it
The principles of it.
How to celebrate it?
Step 2. task 2 : Ask students to compare the Spring Festival and Kwanzaa, then show the differences in groups.
Homework:
Task: Ask students to write an article about a festival which they are interested in.
Suggestions:
1. When and where is the festival celebrated.
2. The birth of the festival.
3. How to celebrate it.
Grammar
Teaching aims: Grasp the modal verbs---must, have to, and have got to
************************************************************************
Teaching procedure:
Step 1 Lead in
Fill in the blanks with ought to, should, had better do.
1. You should see a doctor about that.( It’s a good idea.)
2. You had better go to school tomorrow.(If you don’t go, something bad will happen.)
3. Teacher to student: if you want to pass this class, you had better finish all you assignments.
4. Students to teacher: if you come to my country, you should visit Kyoto.
5. You must try to get to work on time. (I want you to.)
When you trying to advise someone something, you can use should ,ought to, had better do. but make sure their degrees of strength are different. In this class, we’ll focus on “must”. It’s more forceful to express ideas.
Weak
(-------- )
(should/ought to )
(had better )
(must )
Strong
Open books
Step2: Ask Ss to look at the examples and find out the differences in meaning. (p12)
I. Summary for affirmative forms
1. You use must when you think it is necessary.
2. You use have to when someone else thinks it is necessary.
3. In informal English, you can use have got to instead of have to.
II. Fill in the blanks.
1.You must be back by 2 o’clock. ( I want you to do some cleaning)
. 2. He had to wait for his wife to come back at the door if he had lost his key.
3. I must phone my parents tonight.(I think they’ll be worrying about me.)
4. His sister is ill, so he had to stay at home to take care of his sister.
5. I’m tired. I must stop working to have a good sleep.
6.His parents have gone to visit his grandfather. He has to make dinner himself.
Step 3. Discuss the forms of must and had to.
1. We must go now.
We must go tomorrow.
2. I have to go to hospital.
Have you ever had to go to hospital?
I might have to go to hospital.
3.What do I have to do to get a driving licence?
Why did you have to go to hospital?
Karen doesn’t have to work on Saturdays.
Step4: Summary for negative forms: must not , do not have to
I. Examples:
You mustn’t tell George.(= Don’t tell George.)
You don’t have to tell George.(= You can if you like but it isn’t necessary).
II. Finish the sentences with mustn’t or don’t/doesn’t have to.
1. I don’t want anyone to know. You mustn’t tell anyone.
2. He doesn’t have to get to wear a suit to work but he usually does.
3. I can stay in bed tomorrow morning because I ___________________go to work.
4. Whatever you do, you _________________touch that switch. It’s very dangerous.
5. There’s a lift in the building, so we __________________ climb the stairs.
6. You_______________ forget what I told you. It’s very important.
7. Sue ________________ get up early. She gets up early because she wants to.
8. Don’t make so much noise. We ________________ wake the baby.
9. I _________________ eat too much. I’m supposed to be on a diet.
10. You _______________ be a good player to enjoy a game of tennis.
Step 5: Finish off the exercises on page 12,13
I. Look at the table and decide which is necessary and which is not. Make sentences using “must, mustn’t, have to, have not to” (p12)
II.Complete the sentences with have got to (p13)
Step6: Homework:
Workbook p79-80
Type of lesson: language study
Teaching aims: help the students to understand and use the following words and phrases.
hear about, believe, light, support, so that, take in gift symbol faith
Teaching aids: work sheet
***********************************************************************
Teaching procedures:
Step 1. Review the whole text.
Listen to the sentences and fill in the blanks. All the sentences are from the text.
1. Have you heard about Kwanzaa?
2. they used to honour their ancestors, celebrate their past, and the group or society they lived in.
3. Since Kwanzaa is a time for learning as well as joy, people celebrate it by lighting a candle each day and discussing one of the seven principles of Kwanzaa.
4. We should build and support our factories and shops.
5. Whatever the trick, if a person is taken in, he or she is called “April Fool!”
Step 2. Word study.
1. light
1）Understand the following sentences and find out the different property of the word “light”
a. A soft light came into her eyes as she looked at him. ( n.)
b. He was lighting the candle.(verb)
c. He ‘s lost a lot of weight: he’s three kilos lighter than he used to be.(adj)
d. Marriage is not something to be undertaken lightly.(adv)
e. Her eyes lit up with joy.(verb)
2) Summarize
2. support v&n
1). Read the sentences in Column A and find out the different meaning of the word in the sentence situation in Column B.
Column A.
1) Is this bridge strong enough to support heavy lorries? (d)
2) Will you support me in my campaign for election?(a)
3) This evidence supports my argument that she is guilty(e).
4) I was supported by my parents when I was studying.(b)
5) Such a barren (荒脊的) desert can support very few creatures.
Column B
a. to help sb/sth by one’s approval
b. to provide sb with the necessary money
c. to provide enough food and water to keep alive
d. to bear the weight of sth/sb
e. to help to show that a theory is true
2). Ask the Ss to make up sentences according to the given pictures
3.gift
ask the Ss to read the sentences and sum up the meanings of the word “gift”
1) Officials are not allowed to receive gifts from the public.( )
2) I have no gift for foreign languages. So I have to study English very hard to catch up with other students. ( )
Though John is very lazy in his study, he is a gifted boy, isn’t he? He always gets No.1 in the exams in his class. ( )
4. honour
1)ask the Ss to read the sentences and sum up the meanings and structures of the word “honour”.
it is an great honour to be invited.
May I have an honour to dance with you?
Will you honour me with a visit?
2)summarize
5. take in
1)Read the following sentences and get the different meaning of “take in” in each sentence by discussing with their partner.
a. She was homeless, so we took him in.( allow sb to stay in one’s home)
b. She took me in completely with her story.(deceive, delude or fool sb)
c. Fish take in oxygen(氧) through their gills（鳃）.（absorb sth into the body by breathing）
d. This dress need to be taken in at the waist.(make narrower or tighter by altering its seam)
e. The tour took in six European capitals.(include or cover sth)
f. I hope you can take in what I’m saying.(understand or absorb sth that one hears or heads)
2)Ask the Ss to translate the following sentences into Chinese.
Mrs. Brown is a kind old lady. One day when she was walking along the street, she saw a homeless boy begging(乞讨). Mrs. Brown tried to speak with him, but the boy seemed not to take in ( ) what Mrs. Brown was saying. He was so poor that Mrs. Brown decided to take him in ( ). Then she took the boy back home. Her neighbors advised her not to take in ( ) a stranger or she might be taken in ( ). But Mrs. Brown believes that virtue is its own reward(好人有好报).
6. so that
Rewrite the sentences
1) I got up early today . I could catch the first bus.
A.________________________________________.
B _________________________________________.
2) Mary worked very hard . Her classmate could not catch up with her.
A____________________________________________________.
B____________________________________________________ .
7.hear
1) Understand the following sentences and summarize the structures.
Have you heard the news? ( hear sth )
You are not to go – do you hear me! (hear sb.)
I heard that she was ill. (hear that …)
Through the wall ,I heard someone laughing. (hear sb. doing )
He was heard to groan. (be heard to do )
2) Ask the students discuss in groups and then choose correct prep. to fill in the blanks.
from of out about
I have only just heard about his remove.(听到关于某事的消息)
How often do you hear from your sister?（收到某人的来信）
I have never hear of the place / her.（听到或知道某事某人）
3) Practice: translate the following sentences into English.
1. 我们留心听，但什么也没听见。
We _____but could _____ nothing.
2. 我们还是听听他们要说些什么吧。
We’d better hear __________________.
Step 3. Write a passage
Write a short description of your favorite festival. Or you can create your own festival. You ctan use “hear about, gift, support, take in, faith, share, honour…”
Period 6 Integrating skills
Teaching aims: Get the information of festivals by reading.
Get Ss to know how to write an invitation.
************************************************************************
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Fast reading
Read about these festivals and choose the correct pictures.
Step2. Detailed reading
Ask Ss to fill in the chart.
Festival Earth Day Martin Luther
King, Jr Day Day of the Dead April fool’s Day
When is the festival celebrated?
Where is it celebrated?
Why do people celebrate it?
How do people celebrate it?
Step3 Post-reading
Discuss these questions with partners.
1) Since most Chinese are more concerned about losing face than most westerners, would April Fool’s Day be so easily accepted? Why or why not?
2) What do you think “ the first of April is the day we remember what we are the other 364 days of the year.”
3) Why do so many festivals honor our ancestors?
4) What do you think “ a day on, a day off!” means?
Step 4 Extension
Ask the students to look at the four pictures and describe what they see in the pictures.
Possible answers:
1. Easter : It is the most important holiday in spring, especially for Christians(n.基督徒). It can be any Sunday between March 22 and April 25. Many people celebrate it by buying new clothes. Children celebrate by hunting for colored eggs that their parents have hidden around the house. People also give Easter baskets filled with candy and other good things to one another to celebrate the day.
2. Thanks Giving Day: It is a national day in the U.S.A. which is celebrated on the fourth Thursday in November. It is a time for remembrance and for giving thanks. The family eats many kinds of delicious food, such as turkey and pumpkin pie.
3. Mother’s Day: About 100 countries in 5 continents now have this festival. In the United States it celebrated on second Sunday in May. Many people follow the custom of wearing a carnation on that day and children honor their mothers with cards, gifts, and flowers.
4. Halloween: At the end of October Americans will celebrate this holiday. The stores have been full of pumpkins, costumes, and candy for weeks. On October 31, children dress up, go to their neighbors' homes, say “Trick or treat”, and receive a lot of candy.
Step5: Writing
I. Give Ss the sample writing.
1.Formal Letters of Invitation
Mr. and Mrs. Andrew K.K. Wang
request the pleasure of your company
at a dinner
in honor of their parents
Fiftieth Wedding Anniversary
on Sunday, the fifth of July
at eight o'clock
New Asia Hotel
100 Deep Water Bay Road
Hong Kong
R. S. V. P. 谨订于七月五日星期日晚八时在香港深水湾道100号新亚洲大酒店为我们父母的金婚纪念举行晚宴，敬请
光临
王楷康夫妇敬约
敬请回复
2. Informal Letter of Invitation
Dear Miss Smith,
I would like to invite you to my house this coming Sunday. My brother Peter will be staying with us for a few days during the Christmas holidays and my wife and I have planned for him a family dinner so that he can meet some of our friends. We should be delighted if you could join us. I hope you will let me know that you can come.
Yours
Peter
II. Ask Ss to list things to include in an informal invitation. (见目标练习)
1. What?
2. When?
3. Who?
4. Why?
5. Where?
6. Pictures and colors.
III. Get the Ss to write their own invitation.
篇10：unit 5 reading and grammar(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
Period 2 Language Points & Grammar
By XiaoShan No.10 High School Han Miao
Teaching goals
1. Deal with the language points of this reading to help students understand the text better.
2. Try to understand and use the Object Complement.
Teaching important points
1. Try to master some important words and phrases. Eg. available, illegal, hand in hand, accuse of, take into consideration,…
2. let students understand the types of the Object Complement and use it.
Teaching difficult points
How to explain the Object Complement clearly to help students understand it.
Teaching methods
1. Question-and-answer method to go through with the language points and grammar.
2. Check their homework to make every student work in class.
Teaching aids
A computer
Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Greetings
Greet the students as usual.
Step II Language points
We have divided the text into three parts. Let’s check your homework part by part.
1) Part 1 Tick the right answers.
Advertising is a ( highly developed / high developed) industry. The development of media has gone (hand to hand / hand in hand) with its development. In order to influence the choices customers make, advertising tries to associate the product ( to / with) the customers’needs. As people see many ads every day, advertisers must work hard to get their message ( across / across to) .For that reason, companies spend ( large amounts of / large amount of) money employing advertisers who can produce
wonderful ads to(appeal to / appeal for) customers’emotions.While people (react to / react on) abvertisements in different ways. Some people think it useful and entertaining .( On the one hand / On the other hand), some accuse companies ( of / by) using ads to mislead us.
Explain some important points:
1. highly developed
2. hand in hand
3. get across
4. large amounts of
5. accuse sb. of sth.
2.) Part 2 Complete the following sentences with the proper form of the words. The first letter is given.
1. Ads help people in a v_______ of ways.
2. First of all, it can help consumers make right choices to choose among all the a_________ products.
3. There are many things we need to take into c___________ before we buy a new product.
4. Ads a_______ customers to compare prices and quality by explaining the new product to them.
5. A______ with the facts and figures given by advertising, customers are better able to deal with the product.
6. However, not all ads are used to p_______ a product or to increase a company’s profits
7. Many governments use ad campaigns to make people a______ of social problems and government policies.
Explain some important points:
1. a variety of
2. take into consideration
3. arm with
3. not all
3) . Part 3 Find out some mistakes in the following sentences, then correct them.
There are also some bad ads to use legal ways to mislead consumers. It is not always easy to spotting a bad ad. But there are a few things we can look out. First of all, we should always keep a eye out for “hidden information”. Then we should be careful of a trick used in so-called “bait-and-switch” ads. Good ads make it is possible for companies to introduce new products and increase sales. Advertisements should provide accurate information to help consumers to find the right product in the best price., We consumers should learn to analyse ads to protect ourselves from false advertisements and make ourselves to believe this product.
Explain some important points:
1. look out for sth
2. keep an eye out for
3. make it possible
Step III grammar
1. Let students analyse the structure of a sentence:
The ads make ourselves believe this product.
Believe is the Object Complement.
The Object Complement 是位于宾语之后，说明宾语的行为、身份、状态、特征的成分
2. Let students analyse the types of Object Complement by finish the sentences.
1. We call her Linda.(我们叫她琳达) → 名词2. The coat keeps us warm.( 大衣让我们保暖) → 形容词
3. He ordered them away. （他命令他们离开）→ 副词
4. Make yourselves at home. (请随便一点) → 介词短语
5. They wish you to go with them.(他们希望你和他们一起去) → 动词不定式6. I heard you singing.(我听到他正在唱歌) → 现在分词
7. Speak louder to make yourselves heard.(说大声一点，让他们听到你) → 过去分词
要点：
1． 动词不定式作宾补时要注意的地方。
2． 现在分词与动词不定式作宾补的区别。
3． 现在分词和过去分词作宾补的区别
3.Let students do some exercises about the Object Complement.
3. check their answers and explain them if necessary.
Step IV. Homework.
1.Finish the exercises on page 180-181
2.Preview Integrating Skills
.10.11
篇11：Unit 10 American Literature (人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
单元教学目标
(一) 语言知识和语言技能
1． 掌握下列单词和词组
garbage, maid, prince, outcome, penny, grocery, bakery, weep, furnish, shabby, mailbox, bell, rag, rare, garment, worn, carpet, barbershop, haircut, anecdote, booklet, mutton, stove, baggage, pale, prayer, approve, anyhow, shave, comb, tortoise, flash, simplify，attend to, take pride in, do up, let down, fix sth on / upon sb, at length
2． 复习动词时态，能较为准确地使用各种时态。
3． 学会谈论美国文学和评价文学作品。
4． 学习写故事摘要并加以简单评论。
（二）情感目标
1． 体会真挚的爱情，学会多为别人考虑。
2． 观察体会身边周围发生的各种关于爱的事情，并与他人分享。
（三）学习策略
1． 听力策略。如：预测，归纳，抓关键词，听后讨论等。
2． 阅读策略。如：跳读，寻读，预测，猜词，概括，与他人讨论等。
3． 资源策略。充分利用、学习课本资源，适当利用课外及网络资源。
参考网站：www.english.uiuc.edu/maps/poets/m_r/randall/life.htm
iteslj.org/
www.xieying.net/orin/ShowArticle.asp?ArticleID=983
www.en8848.com/Article/Class9/Class10/-10-26/436.html
www.4english.cn/
www.englishcat.com/
a4esl.org/q/h/vm/verbtense.html
（四）文化意识
1． 了解美国主要的文学家及他们的主要作品。
2． 通过故事情节，了解了圣诞节在西方人的生活中的重要性。
II. 教材分析
本单元以美国文学（American literature）为中心话题,通过诗歌欣赏，讨论美国文学的主题和阅读文学名著等学习方式，使学生对美国文学的特点以及发展历史和现状有一定的认识和了解，并能学会判断和描述一部文学作品的主题、内容梗概和写作方法；能够运用所学的语言知识和技能听懂以对话形式对文学俱乐部举行的某些活动的评论，如成功和失败之处、优点和缺点所在等；并能用英语谈论美国文学作品，包括判断主题、分析写作特点、讨论作品主人公的个性、总结中心思想，描写故事情景等，并对作品加以评论。
WARMING UP部分用美国黑人诗人达德利兰德尔（Dudley Randall）的一首小诗 “Ancestors”激发学生了解美国文学的兴趣，并使学生对美国黑人的诗歌有一个初步认识。它既呈现了本单元的中心话题-American literature，又以回答问题的形式帮助学生以这首小诗为线索去探究美国文学的特点,列举美国文学的主题和故事类型，为以后关于“American literature”的进一步听、说、读、写的学习打下基础。
LISTENING是一篇对话，Ben, Ann and Lily正在为俱乐部组织一次英语活动，活动的内容也有关美国文学，但听力的重点是了解阅读俱乐部的优越性。该部分设置的问题是：分析本次活动成功的原因和一些英语角活动不成功的原因，题目设计有一定难度。但是通过这项任务的完成，能够培养学生抓住听力材料中的要点信息、同时加以分析和总结的能力。
SPEAKING 是一项对话练习，要求学生就美国文学的主题进行讨论。文学是一面镜子，往往能反映一个国家重要历史时期和重要事件。这部分给出四幅图片，运用已有的关于美国的历史知识去判断每幅图片有可能表达的一部文学作品的主题是什么。这项设计的特点是：①让学生使用有关谈论文学作品的特点、人物以及故事发生的时间、地点等方面的语言交流自己对某些文学作品看法和观点；②丰富学生谈论文学作品的语言，包括词汇和句型等；③激发学生对美国文学的兴趣，并加深对美国文学的了解，为今后喜爱阅读更多的美国文学作品的原著打下初步的基础。
PRE-READING是READING的热身活动。设计了两个任务供学生实践和完成。第一项任务是：通过略读的方法快速获取信息并推断故事情节的进一步发展。第二项任务是：用浏览的方式在课文中快速找出特定的信息用以回答问题。
READING 是一部短篇小说，改编自美国著名短篇小说家欧亨利的著名短篇小说《麦琪的礼物》。文章讲述了一对穷困的年轻夫妇为互赠圣诞礼物而忍痛卖掉引以自豪的长发和祖传金表，却换来了不再起作用的发梳和表链的故事，反映了美国下层人民生活的艰难和辛酸，赞美了主人公善良的心地和相濡以沫的爱情。文章情节生动，构思巧妙，文笔简短而精练，结局出人意料。
POST-READING 部分设计了三类任务，其中第一类是针对文章的理解，评价学生对文章理解的程度 (Exx.1-4) ；第二类是要求学生以根据课文做出的正误判断题为线索写一篇描述德拉的短文 (Ex.5) ；第三类任务要求学生根据已知的故事情节推断小说后半部分的故事情节将会怎样发展 (Ex.6) 。后两项任务具有很大的灵活性和挑战性,同时又能激发学生的兴趣和想象能力。
LANGUAGE STUDY 分为词汇和语法两项。词汇部分帮助学生学习用适合的形式和意义使用重点词汇和短语，旨在培养学生运用英语词汇和短语的能力。语法项目是复习动词的各种时态。在这部分练习中，学生同时能了解和学习有关作者O Henry 的生平。
INTEGRATING SKILLS 包括读和写两部分。该部分是READING的续篇。在这部分中，小说的故事情节有了戏剧性的发展和出乎意料、却又在情理之中的结局。该部分的教学重点是分析文章的写作特点和表现手法并启发学生细心体会作者是如何以文学作品为载体去表达一个深刻的思想内涵的。写作部分的任务有两项：一是根据所给出的四幅图片描写本篇小说的故事情节；二是写一篇这部小说的摘要并对此加以评论以提高学生的写作能力。
III. 教材内容处理
根据本单元的特点要求和我校学生的具体情况，我将本单元的教材做以下处理：
从话题内容上分析，warming up 和speaking 的内容关系密切; listening 部分虽然与单元话题有关，但如果它置于warming up 和 speaking之间，不利于话题的衔接。所以，我从英语学习引入，先上listening，讨论英语俱乐部活动的内容、优点，到warming up 的关于控诉奴隶制的小诗，再讨论其它的文学形式和主题，即speaking的内容，三者组成第一课时。打破了常规，但更有利于课堂上话题的衔接，课堂环节的衔接更加自然。
Reading部分和Integrating skills部分都是关于欧亨利的短篇小说《麦琪的礼物》，为了故事的完整性，我将两课阅读整合，但还是用两个课时来处理。第一节课，主要是整体阅读，通过问题的回答了解故事的主要内容及部分细节，两部分之间让学生“预测”来连接。因为故事中对女主人公的内心世界，行为进行了详细地描写，而对男主人公给描写给读者留下了很大的空间，所以阅读完成之后，我让学生展开想象，想象男主人公打算买礼物，回家路上，见了妻子后，知道妻子为他所做的一切之后等一系列思想活动。第二课时，主要对故事进行细的处理，从小说的三要素引入，复习故事的主要内容，然后对人物的语言、情感进行分析，探讨作者的写作技巧。之后，让学生创造性地想象故事的继续发展：主人公Della如何筹钱赎回丈夫的金表。接着，呈现课后的四幅图片，看图说话，复习故事的主要情节，口头叙述故事，为写作做好准备。最后，用作者欧亨利的原话来进一步归纳主题，并让学生讨论除了夫妻间的爱，人世间还有什么其它的爱，进一步深化主题。
Language Study 也用两个课时。第四课时，处理两阅读课中的难句和语言点，包括word study,并让学生任选五个或五个以上的短语编故事。（这个练习能促使学生积极主动使用学过的短语进行富有想象力的创作，从而提高学生的综合利用语言的能力，有利于培养学生的想象力和创造力。）
Grammar单独一节课作为第五课时，内容是复习所有动词时态，内容多，并且重要。先让学生自己课前进行归纳，上课检查复习，然后用一个含有多种时态小故事复习各种时态名称、结构及用法。再用一个Flash巩固各种时态的用法。
语法训练是这节课的重点。根据教学大纲、高考考试说明和平时掌握情况，复习应该侧重动词时态在具体语言环境中的运用。因此，所有的练习材料都应该围绕动词时态的运用来设计。根据高考题型及学生认知特点，由易到难我设计安排了四个练习题：单项选择、完成句子，语篇填空和短文改错(选做)。 最后用近几年有关动词时态考察的高考题来作为家庭作业，进一步提升巩固时态的用法。
其中单选题直接用网站 the Internet TESL Journal For Teachers of English as a Second Language，语言地道，题目简单，但包括所有的时态。在课堂上用竞赛的形式快速完成；完成句子和语篇填空均利用课本上的语法练习。短文改错自己改编。
Workbook中的练习处理。删减了Listening部分和Talking 部分。vocabulary 中的练习1和练习2作为词汇复习的作业。练习3作为学生复述的例子，也可作为课堂练习巩固课文内容的检测。语法练习作为语法课作业的补充。Integrating Skills中的阅读作为泛读补充。
即：
1st Period Listening, warming up & speaking
2nd Period Reading (I)
3rd Period Reading (II)
4th Period Language points & Word Study
5th Period Grammar
（注：经教材分析，根据学情，本单元可以用5课时完成，但我校通常再加2节练习课，或复习课以完成一些配套练习。）
IV. 单元教学设计的亮点：
1. Listening内容的改编，降低难度。Warming up 和Speaking相连，浑然一体。
2. Reading 的第二课时处理灵活巧妙，并有意识地培养学生对外国文学的鉴赏能力。通过形式多样的课堂活动，训练了学生的口头表达能力、想象力和创造力。
3. 语法复习时，让学生自己归纳，主动学习。课上将语法用在情景语境中学习，并用了Flash, 激发了兴趣，活跃了气氛。语法练习的设计安排由浅入深。
4．Speaking部分由于学生程度的关系，处理较为简单，但在后面的设计中学生的口头练习机会多，而且有话可说，弥补了不足。
V. 分课时教案
Period 1
Teaching Objectives:
1. Learn and master the following:
leave…behind, be proud of, garbage, maid, prince,
2. Do some listening and practise some listening strategies, like summarizing, predicting etc.
3. Learn a poem and understand the meaning of it and learn something about American literature.
Teaching Important Points:
1. Train the students’ listening strategy--predicting.
2. Understand the listening material and the poem.
Teaching Difficult Point:
How to improve the students’ listening ability
Teaching Methods:
1. Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through with the listening materials.
2.Individual,pair of group work to make every student work in class.
3. Reading aloud.
Teaching Aids:
1.a tape recorder
2.the multimedia
3.the blackboard
Teaching procedure:
Step 1 Lead in
T: We’ve learned English for a few years. Which do you find most difficult, listening ,speaking, reading, or writing?
In your opinion, what can we do to improve our spoken English? Or what kind of activities can you think of to practise English in a way that makes it fun?
Collect the students’ answers.
T: Have you ever taken part in an English Corner? What do you think of it?
Have you heard of reading club? Can you guess what people can do in a reading club?
Collect the students’ answers.
Step 2 Pre-listening
Go through the questions in Listening on P83,and try to guess what the listening material is about, and get the students to guess the answers.
Step 3 While-listening
1. Play the tape and try to get the answer to the question: What activity are Ben, Ann and Lily organising?
2. Listen to the tape and try to fill in the gaps.
1) Besides, it is more and more difficult to find _________________ to come and talk to us. In an ________ ____________ , the topics are always ______ _______. You often don’t know what else to talk about. So we got together and decided to _______ another kind of ________. (Who?____________)
2) The last story we read together was the ______ of _____ ______, by Jack London and before that we read a few _________ stories by Mark Twain. I am just reading for _________. I think the Club ______ me to read more and ______ more. (Who?____________)
3) I would recommend everyone to join a ______ ______. It’s an _________ and ____________ way of speaking English. You also _______ more about life and literature in ______________ countries.(goal: get the students to catch the key words, making the question answering easy.) (Who?____________)
Step 4 Post-listening
Why is this activity successful, while the English Corner is not ? At least two reasons.
T: Now there is a chance for us to experience it .
Step 5 A poem
1. Skimming
Skim the poem with the question: What kind of text is the one you have just read?
2. Reading
Read the poem and try to answer the following questions:
1) What is it about and what does it mean?
2) Can you guess who wrote the poem, a white poet or a black one?
3) Is this American literature or English literature? Could it be written by a poet from another country? What makes you think so?
Introduce some information about the writer. Get the information on the Internet.
www.english.uiuc.edu/maps/poets/m_r/randall/life.htm
Or give the Ss a reading material about Dudley Randall, do a fast reading with several sentences to decide True or False.
Poet, publisher, editor, and founder of Broadside Press. Dudley Randall was born 14 January 1914 in Washington, D.C. His first published poem appeared in the Detroit Free Press when he was thirteen. Randall worked in the post office while earning degrees in English and library science (1949 and 1951).for the next five years he was librarian at Morgan State and Lincoln(Mo.) universities, returning to Detroit in 1956 to a position in the Wayne County Federated Librarian and poet in residence at the University of Detroit, retiring in 1974.
When “Ballad of Birmingham,” written in response to the 1963 bombing of a church in which four girls were killed, was set to music and recorded, Randall established Broadside Press in 1965, printing the poem on a single sheet to protect his rights. Following the 1967 riot in Detroit, Randall published Cities Burning(1968),a group of thirteen poems. In all his life, he was regarded as a pioneer in independent African American book publishing and he is sure to be remembered for his poems as well.
( )1.Dudley Randall was a British poet and he liked to write for blacks.
( )2.When he was fifteen, his first poem appeared in the Detroit Free Press.
( )3.His family was rich enough so that he didn’t have to work as a librarian while he was studying English degree in college.
( )4. “Ballad of Birmingham” was written in response to the 1963 bombing of a church in which four girls were killed.
( )5.Dudley Randall was thought to be both a great publisher and an outstanding poet.
4) Deal with some key words: kings and queens, the common people, pigs, the Old Country .
5) What’s the theme of the poem?
T: After class,try to read some other poems of Dudley Randall. E.g: Ballad of Birmingham
Step 6 Discussion
T: Slavery is one of the major themes in literature of America. Think about the history and life in the United States. What special themes and sort of stories would you expect to find in American literature?
Look at the pictures and guess what theme each of them would be about.
Can you name some famous writers and their works?
Get the students to have a short discussion and try to report their answers.
Step 7 Summary and Homework
T: In this class, we’ve done some listening and read a poem. We’ve also talked about the magor themes in literature of America.
Try to find some good English poems or some short stories and share with your classmates next period.
Try to find as much information as you can about O Henry.
So much for today .Goodbye, everyone!
Period 2
Teaching objectives:
1. To enjoy O.Henry’s classical works.
2. To learn how to read short stories
6) To retell the story in their own words.
7) To learn some new words and phrases
8) To train the students’ reading strategies, such as skimming, scanning, summarizing.
Teaching Important Points:
1. To train the students’ reading strategies, such as skimming, scanning, summarizing.
2. Enable the students to understand the story and try to retell it.
3. How to get the students to master the useful expressions.
Teaching Difficult Points:
Retell the story in the very period.
Teaching Methods:
1. Fast reading to get the general idea of the text.
2. Questioning-and-answering activity to help the students go through the whole passage.
4. Pair work or individual work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:
1. A tape recorder
2. A multimedia
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1.Revision
1.Get the students to share their findings, such as short poems, stroies.
2. Guide the students to get to know some famous American writers and their works by matching the books with the writers.
The Adventure of Tom Sawyer ---- Mark Twain
The Beast in the Jungle ----Henry James
A Farewell to Arms ----- Ernest Hemingway
The Old Man and the Sea ----- Ernest Hemingway
Adventures of Huckleberry Finn ----Mark Twain
The Gift of the Magi ---- O Henry
The Call of the Wild ----Jack London
The Scarlet Letter ---- Nathaniel Hawthorne
3. What do you know about O Henry?(consult Appendix III)
Step 2. Scanning
T: The gift of the Magi is retitled by the editor as A Sacrifice for Love. After reading the story, you will know the reason.
Read the passage and try to answer the questions:
Who are the main characters in the story?
What’s the relationship between them?
What are Jim’s wages?
What kind of flat do they live?
Were they rich? Find the sentences to support your ideas.
What are the couple’s two most precious possessions?
What price does Della pay to buy her present?
How does she get the money?
Does Della think having a haircut will make Jim happy? How do you know?
Step 3. Predicting
What do you think will happen?
Get the students to use their imagination and guess the ending of the story.
Step 4 Reading
Read the second part of the story with the question: What was Jim’s reaction when he saw Della?
Then try to finish the following questions.
1.How did Della expect Jim to react when he saw her?
A. happy B. angry C. disappointed D. both B and C
2. What did Jim buy for Della ?
A. a shampoo B. a hat C. A comb D. A new overcoat
3. Which of the following is NOT true according to the story?
A. The day before Christmas Della was worried because she had only saved one dollar and eighty-seven cents for Jim’s Christmas present.
B. The young couple lived a hard life but they loved each other deeply.
C. Della was very nervous and worried before she heard Jim’s step when he came back home from work.
D. When Della saw her present, she was so happy to get the expensive combs that she burst into tears.
4.Which of the following is true according to the story?
A. The Christmas day was coming. Della was very happy and she was looking forward to it.
B. Jim and Della were both cried when they saw each other’s present.
C. Jim didn’t love Della any more when he saw that she had her hair cut off.
D. Jim sold his gold watch out of his love for Della.
5. What does the story mainly tell us?
A. How to celebrate a happy Christmas for a young and rich couple.
B. How to choose Christmas presents for couples.
C.A love story between a young and poor couple.
D. Money is love.
Step 5 Paraphrase some difficult sentences
Find the sentences in the passages and try to explain in English.(tell the students how to “Paraphrase” sentences.)
1.Pennies saved…until one’s cheeks burnt.
2. In the hall below was a mailbox into which no letter would go.
3. Twenty dollars doesn’t go far.
4. Expenses had been greater than she had calculated.
5. Many happy hours had she spent planning for something nice for him.
6. Down flowed the brown cascade.
7. There was no other like it in any of the stores, and she had turned all of them inside out.
8. Jim might be properly anxious about the time in any company.
9. Della doubled the chain in her hand
10. The dull precious metal seemed to flash, as if reflecting her bright spirit.
Step 5 Summary
What’s the clue of the story?
What do the main characters do to show their true love?
What’s the main idea of the story?
What’s the meaning of the title?
Retell the story briefly in your own words.(Pair work )
Then get several students to retell the story.
Step 6.Imagination
Imagine what Jim was thinking about in the following four periods. One group one topic,and discuss in small groups of four.
1 How he decided to buy his wife a gift
2 On his way home
3 The moment he saw Della with short hair
4 After he knew what Della had done for him
( Goal: 1.To develop the students’ imagination
2. To understand their love more deeply and sublime the students’ feelings.)
Step 7 Homework
1. Try to finish the exercises in the Post-reading on Page85 and Page 89.
2. Finish the exercises in Word Study on Page 86.
3. Which character speaks the following lines and what do these lines tell us about their character?
1) And now I think we should have our dinner.
2) Will you buy my hair?
3) I sold the watch to get the money to buy the combs.
4) You've cut off your hair?
5) Isn't it perfect, Jim?
6) What could I do with a dollar and eighty-seven cents?
7) Don't you like me now?
8) You won't care, will you?
Re-tell the story by putting the lines in order.
Period 3
Teaching objectives:
1. To understand the story better.
2. To learn how to read short stories
3. To learn to respect other’s love and think of others more than themselves
4.To develop imagination and creativity
Teaching Important Points:
1. To analyze the feelings of the main characters.
2. To learn the writing style of O Henry.
Teaching Difficult Points:
To analyze the feelings of the main characters.
Teaching Methods:
1.Questioning-and-answering activity to help the students understand the story better
2. Group work to make sure every student can take part in the activities
Teaching Aids:
1. A tape recorder
2. A multimedia
3. Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Talk about the elements of a story.
Setting
What is the setting of the story? Think about time and place.
Character
How many characters are in the story?
Can you name them?
Which character speaks the following lines and what do these lines tell us about
their character?
And now I think we should have our dinner.
Will you buy my hair?
I sold the watch to get the money to buy the combs.
You've cut off your hair?
Isn't it perfect, Jim?
What could I do with a dollar and eighty-seven cents?
Don't you like me now?
You won't care, will you?
Re-tell the story by putting the lines in order.
Answers
1 And now I think we should have our dinner.
Jim: He doesn't want either of them to worry or think too much about their new gifts and lost
possessions. He just wants them to enjoy Christmas together.
2 Will you buy my hair?
Della: She is willing to sacrifice her beautiful hair to be able to buy a nice gift for her husband.
3 I sold the watch to get the money to buy the combs.
Jim: He is willing to sell his most prized possession, his watch, to buy Della a nice gift.
4 You've cut off your hair?
Jim: He realizes that Della will not need the combs he bought her for a while.
5 Isn't it grand, Jim?
Della:She really wants to make Jim happy.
6 What could I do with a dollar and eighty-seven cents?
Della: She doesn't have very much money and she is worried that she can't buy a nice present for Jim.
7 Don't you like me now?
Della: She is worried that Jim will not like her with short hair.
8 You won't care, will you?
Della: She is worried that Jim will not like her with short hair.
In what order are the lines spoken in the story? (2, 6, 8, 4, 7, 5, 3, 1)
Plot
What is the climax of the story?
What is the end of the story?
What are the characteristics of the story?
The ending of the story is surprising.
Step 2. Analyzing the feelings
T: What’s the clue/chain of the story?(Repeat the structure of the story)
--------- LOVE
T: How does the writer describe the deep love of the main characters?
Eg: Jim loved Della deeply .
Find out sentences showing his love to Della.
Conclusion: By way of words and actions.
T: Another example.
Della didn’t have enough to buy Jim a gift. She was sad.
Get the feelings of Della from what she said and did.(find the sentences in the passages)
Collect the students’ sentences and explain something difficult.
T: Find another example and try to analyze it in the same way.(homework)
(goal: To learn to analyze the feelings of the characters by his or her actions and words.)
Step 3 Creativity
Jim gave up his watch to buy a gift for Della, and Della thought of him more than herself. So she really wanted to buy back Jim’s watch. How could she raise the money?
( Goal: to develop the students’ creativity)
Step 4 Discussion(group work)
At the end of the story, O.Henry seems to be saying two different things. Read the following paragraph and answer the questions
“And here I have told you the story of two children who were not wise. Each sold the most valuable thing he owned in order to buy a gift for the other. But let me speak a last word to the wise of these days: Of all who give gifts, these two were the most wise.”
Who are the two children?
Jim and Della
Why does O' Henry refer to them as “children”?
Although they are both young adults, they are simple like children in many ways.
How were they unwise?
They sold valuable things to buy gifts that they didn't really need to buy in the first place, because they were truly in love.
How were they wise?
They thought only of the other person and not of themselves when they gave their gifts.The main theme of the short story: Love is the greatest gift of all.
(Goal: to understand the story better.)
Step 5 Reading aloud
Play the tape for the students to follow.
Step 6.Writing
T: Well, now you’ve learned the story,and I hope you can recommend it to your friends. You can describe the plot to make them interested in it; or you can write a summary of the story and give your own opinion about the story.
1.Get the students to describe the pictures on Page 89
Picture1:Della, poor, bargained when buying necessities in daily life to save money for the present for Jim.
Picture2: Proud of her beautiful hair, fought with her own mind before finally decided to sell it to get some money.
Picture3: Jim, sold the watch to get the money to buy the combs for Della.
Picture4: Both of the presents couldn’t be used, but they got real love.
2. Then describe the plot of the story and give your opinions on it to each other orally.
3. Write it down as your homework.
Step 7.Summary
T:The proverb “Love is the greatest gift of all” best describes the main theme of A Sacrifice For Love (The Gift of the Magi) .this is the love beween husband and wife.Besides Love between husband and wife. Can you name some other kinds of love?
There are other kinds of love. Love between parents and children, friends, classmates, teachers and students. There’s even love to a stranger , animals and to the whole world. Think of your own story about love or the story you have heard or read about love and share them tomorrow.
( Goal: To further understand the theme----love)
Step 8 Homework
1. Write the plot down as homework.
2. Try to share with classmates your own story about love or the story you have heard or read about love.
3. Try to read another short novel of O Henry, “The Last Leaf”, for example.
Period 4
Teaching objectives:
1. Review the story .
2. Learn the use of some words and useful expressions.
Teaching Important Points:
1. How to guess the missing word according to the given sentence or passage.
2. Learn the use of some key words and useful expressions
Teaching Difficult Point:
Master the use of the key words and useful expressions.
Teaching Methods:
1. Grammar method.
2. Explanation and inductive methods to make the students master the interchanges of direct and indirect objects.
3. Individual, pair work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:
1. The blackboard
2. The multimedia
Step 1 Revision
Check some students’ writing orally.
Step 2 Phrases
Have a competition to find all the phrases.
Live in a furnished flat
attend to her cheeks
be worthy of
take pride in
search for
do up
be covered with
take a second look at
double the watch chain
Step 3. Language points
Deal with some of the phrase above in detail and make sure the students can use them.
1. Pennies saved one or two at a time by bargaining at the grocery, at the bakery and the butcher’s until one’s cheeks burnt....
句中的at a time 是“一次”的意思。 其同义词是once. 但once还有“曾经”的意思.
e.g. We can’t do two things at a time.
注意 at a time和以下这些短语的区别:
at one time: (过去)有个时期, 一度
at any time: 无论何时, 随时
2…Della finished crying and attended to her cheeks with the powder rag. (Para3)
Translate the following sentences.
Doctor Manette attended to a young peasant boy and girl, who had been wounded … P197
The nurse attended to the wounded day and night.
Are you being attended to, sir?
Could you attend to this matter immediately?
3. Expenses had been greater than she had calculated. (Para3)
Learn some phrases about “ expense”
at great/considerable/vast expenses
at the expense of sb / sth.
at one’s / one’s own expense.
Travel/medical/living expenses
4. Something fine and rare --- something worthy of the honor of owned by Jim. (Para3)
It was a gold watch chain. It was worthy of the Watch. (Para8)
5.. It reached below her knee and made itself almost a garment for her. And then she quickly did it up again. (Para5)
6.. Della doubled the watch chain in her hand ….
What does double mean in the following sentences:
A. She got double scholarships
B. Double the carpet, and cover it on the baby.
7.. Poor fellow, he was only twenty-two ---- and to be burdened with a family!
and to be burdened with a family → He was to be burdened with a family
8.. His eyes were fixed upon Della, and there was an expression in them that she could not read.
be fixed upon →__stare at__
in them → in his eyes__
eg:
She was _____ frightened that she could not _____ her thoughts on anything.
A. so; fix B. so; spend C. such; fix D. such; spend
9. I have my hair cut off and sold it because I couldn’t have lived through Christmas without giving you a present.
have one’s hair cut have sth done
couldn’t have lived through Christmas without giving you a present →
If I __________ you a present , I couldn’t have lived through Christmas.
Eg:
今天下午我要去修理我的自行车。
10. However, she hugged them to her breast, and at length she was able to look up and smile and say: “My hair grows so fast, Jim!”
Step 4 Word study
Correct the answers to the exercises in Word Study and make sure the students can understand them.
Step 5 Homework
Revise the words and phrases learned in this period and choose at least five of them to make up a story . Share your stories tomorrow.
Write out the forms of different verb tenses.
Period 5. Grammar
Teaching objectives:
To revise all the verb tenses and learn how to use them correctly.
Teaching important points:
The usage of all the verb tenses.
Teaching difficult points
How to teach the students to master the usage of all the verb tenses.
Teaching methods
Concluding, summarizing and practice
Teaching aids
A projector and a computer
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
1 Get some students to read their stories aloud and give a short comment.
2 Show one student’s homework about the tenses.
Step 2 Presentation
1 Show a short passage on the screen:
Get the students to read through the passage and line out the different tenses in the short passage.
Tom is my good friend. Last Sunday, I asked him, “Dare you break the school rules?” “Certainly. I’ll make you a great surprise.” The next day at 8 o’clock., I found Tom was riding a bike in the schoolyard, which broke school rules badly. Now, Tom has been punished. He has been sweeping all of the six floors in the Teaching Building for three days. Now I’m helping him because I had promised him before that whenever he was in trouble, I would share with him together.
2 Lead the Ss to review the tenses and the Ss answer with the teacher’s adding and correcting.(Write the verb/ verb phrases on the blackboard, then the name of the tense, at last , the form of the verb, for example: asked, 一般过去时，did)
3 Play a flash about the usage of the tenses and get the students to consolidate it.
Step 3 Exercises
1.Multiple choice :An extra exercise on Internet.(in a way of competition)
a4esl.org/q/h/vm/verbtense.html （This exercise is easy and covers the main verb tenses and can be done on the Internet, which interest the Ss.）
1) By the end of the year, she ___ with a degree in business.
a. already graduates
b. will have already graduated
c. has already graduated
Answer b
2) As soon as I ___ home, it started to rain heavily.
a. get
b. got
c. will have gotten
Answer b
3) We ___ the chance to visit many museums in Paris last vacation.
a. had
b. had had
c. have had
Answer a
4) I ___ on this project for days without success.
a. have been worked
b. have been working
c. had being worked
Answer b
5) Don't worry. She ___ by herself.
a. is used to living
b. is used to live
c. used to living
Answer a
6) I ___ hard until I pass the TOEFL.
a. will study
b. study
c. have studied
Answer a
7) Next month we ___ our 5th wedding anniversary.
a. will be celebrated
b. will have been celebrating
c. will be celebrating
Answer c
8) If you ___ it, give it a go.
a. didn't try
b. haven't tried
c. hadn't tried
Answer b
9) I wish I ___ a millionaire so I could travel all over the world.
a. was
b. had been
c. were
Answer c
10) He ___ to class this morning because he was sick.
a. didn't come
b. hadn't come
c. hasn't come
Answer a
11) He ___ it on purpose.
a. denied having done
b. denied have done
c. denied done
Answer a
12) Children ___ to free education.
a. should entitle
b. should be entitled
c. should to be entitled
Answer b
13) ___ a UFO?
a. Did you ever see
b. Do you ever see
c. Have you ever seen
Answer c
14) Whenever I ___ talk to my boss, I get butterflies in my stomach.
a. had to
b. will have to
c. have to
Answer c
15) They ___ together for five years when they decided to get married.
a. had been
b. have been
c. were
Answer a
16) While the reporter ___ the policeman, the robber escaped.
a. interviewing
b. was interviewing
c. had been interviewing
Answer b
17) She ___ extremely quiet since her husband died.
a. is
b. has been
c. was
Answer b
18) If he ___ with his girlfriend, he ___ now.
a. hadn't broken up / wouldn't be suffering
b. hadn't broken up / wouldn't suffer
c. didn't break up / wouldn't be suffering
Answer a
2.Complete sentences and a passage. Get the students to do some exercises for consolidation. P87-88
Try to correct each other’s answers in pairs first and then give them the correct answers.
Step 4 Summary and homework
Today we have reviewed eight kinds of verb tenses.(Write them on the blackboard.) And we have also done some exercises to consolidate them. After class, you need to do more exercises and try to read a grammar book about verb tenses to master them better.
Homework:
1. P220-221 Ex1-2
2. An exercise about verb tenses(近几年高考题)
3. Make up a story and try to use as many tenses as possible.
篇12：Unit 2 Crossing limits教学设计及教案(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
I．单元教学目标
技能目标Skill Goals
▲Talk about exploring the world
▲Practise judging situations and making decisions
▲Review the predicate
▲Write a persuasive essay
II．目标语言
功
能
句
式 Expressions to judge situations and make decisions:
a. Expressions used to judge situations:
1. From my understanding, I find it possible that…
2. In my opinion, nobody has the right to…
3. For the sake of…, I believe…
4. In respect for…, we should…
5. Everything has two sides, but I …
6. By no means should we sacrifice people’s life in the name of science…
b. Expressions used to make decisions:
1. It’s hard to decide… however,
2. Take everything into consideration, I …
3. In spite of…, I still believe…
4. I am likely to think… because…
5. My choice will be…
词
汇 1. 四会词汇
evaluate, various, key, origin, equip, puzzle, wealthy, Asian, African, ambassador, wander, motherland, existence, accurate, navy, treasure, command, royal, embassy, zebra, volunteer, radium, dam, suggest, accomplish, sickness, unable, sacred, refer, aircraft, arise, evidence, chairman, praise
2. 认读词汇
Christopher Columbus, endeavor, Marco Polo, spice, Ceylon, Arab, westernmost, Roman, empire, rhinoceros, horn, Shanga, awareness, fleet, symbolic, sum, horizon, navigation, Korea, the Himalayas, Sherpa, Tibet, honesty, dedication, ideal, technological
3. 词组
in the name of, in exchange for, set sail, in return, bring up, apart from, refer to, run out
4. 重点词汇
various, key, wealthy, accurate, wander, suggest, accomplish, arise, praise
语
法 Review the Predicate:
1. A team of scientists discovers an important ancient grave near the village of native people.
2. I was reading a book about Marco Polo when you called.
3. We can send robots equipped with cameras and other tools to do observations for us.
4. The world map was a great puzzle to people of early civilizations.
5. A small bronze statue of lion has been found in the Swahili town of Shanga.
重
点
句
子 1. Trade and curiosity have often formed the foundation for mankind’s greatest endeavor.
2. The Arabic contacts to the African coast led to the next meeting between black people and a Chinese.
3. The contacts between China and Africa over the centuries had led to the awareness of each other’s existence, but still no accurate maps of the countries around the Indian Ocean existed.
4. In the years between 1405 and 1433, seven large treasure fleets sailed westwards on voyages of trade and exploration.
5. The fleet made several expeditions before the exploration was stopped, probably for economic reasons.
III.教材分析与教材重组
1． 教材分析
本单元的话题是Crossing limits，话题涉及的历史和地理知识庞杂，给学生理解文章带来了较大难度。Pre-reading, Reading和Post-reading部分涉及了许多背景知识，这会给学生精读文章带来障碍。Warming Up, Listening和Integrating Skills部分涉及到Exploration话题的空间跨度很大，因此解决好中外、过去和现在Exploration的关系可以促进学生理解话题--跨越极限。Speaking和Writing以判断和劝诱为主题，旨在通过理解和学习话题，发展学生理解观点和形成自主判断，促进学生的自主决策能力。
1．1 WARMING UP 以4位中外航海家的图片为引线，引出了本单元人物和话题。4个任务设计层层深入，首先由人物事迹逐渐导向单元话题--Exploration。最后一个任务把话题引向具体的单元话题的目标语言。
1．2 LISTENING包括Pre-listening, While-listening和Post-listening三个部分。Pre-listening的目的是培养学生听前预测的能力，这就使得听的过程目的性很强。Post-listening的两个任务设计各有侧重，任务1强调对听力内容的整体理解，任务2则侧重对话题思想的理解，重在培养学生解决问题的能力。整体上来看，Listening的设计旨在培养学生预测、选择、判断和深层加工信息的能力。
1．3 SPEAKING 部分包括三个Situations。三个Situations都是以科学发现和探测为主题，提出问题情境，旨在培养学生对问题情境的判断能力和运用语言解决问题的能力。问题的情境设计具有思辨性特征，学习者只有对问题情境的深刻理解，才能做出准确的判断，在此基础上形成决策。
1．4 READING部分包括Pre-reading, Reading 和Post-reading三个部分。 Pre-reading以Silk Road为主题，输入背景知识，促进学生对Reading的深刻理解。Reading讲述了海上丝绸之路开辟的背景、发展和繁荣，文章的后半部分重点记叙了郑和下西洋的过程和意义。Reading的主题内容明确，此主题是培养学生民族自豪感的好材料。Reading的语言材料不难，但是由于文章所记叙的内容时间跨度很大，关系略显复杂，学生不易把握文章的结构。教学中处理好背景知识输入和读懂文章整体结构的任务设计，就基本可以很好地完成教学任务。Post-reading是对Reading内容的熟练和主题的拓展，最后一个任务升华了主题。这些任务设计都要求学生跨越段落寻找信息，因此教学设计中要适当补充和重新设计Tasks，以使得大多数学生都能读透文章。
1．5 LANGUAGE STUDY 分词汇和语法两部分。其中，Word study的前两个练习序列性很强，两个练习设计注重词性拓展和运用。任务中基本涉及到本单元重点词汇和常见词汇，但是对学生而言，仅依靠这样两个任务设计是不能够达到熟练的目的，因此应该适当的在Homework或者Integrating Skills部分运用恰当的任务设计来达到使学生能够熟练运用这些词汇的目标。Word Study的第三个练习训练学生在语境中运用词汇的能力，材料内容补充了本单元话题的背景知识。Word Study基本上呈现出了本单元的重点词汇，任务形式以训练为载体，强调了语言知识的运用能力，因此教学中要细处理。Grammar 则分成两个Parts. Part 1要求学生要学会识别和判断Predicate；Part2强调了Predicate在语篇中的运用。由于是复习内容，所以两个Task的内容设计显得简单，可以适当补充一些Tasks来强化学生在写作过程中准确运用Predicate的能力。
1．6 INTEGRATING SKILLS分为2部分：Reading 和Writing。Reading记叙了中外Pioneers爬越珠穆朗玛峰的过程，文章的语言内容不难，不会对学生构成整体的阅读障碍，但文章中涉及到的一些细节知识需要学生细读才能准确把握，因此可利用本篇阅读材料重点培养学生细节理解能力。阅读材料后的四个任务设计都是围绕细节理解展开，任务设计采用口头回答和Paraphrasing的形式，目的是训练学生的口头表达能力。Writing部分的内容以阅读材料为背景，以爬山是否应该带氧气为主题形成讨论，分为两种观点。题目设计同前面Speaking话题相同，训练学生的思维辨析能力，提高其运用笔头形式表达观点的能力。写作要求学生要拓展话题，了解更多的Mountain-climbing事实或实例来支持观点。因此写好文章的关键重在于事例和事实的采集、整理和分析。
1．7 Tips的主题内容是阅读指导，指导学生对于不同文体和主题的阅读材料要选用不同的阅读方法。阅读策略训练一直都是阅读指导的重点，因此可选用报刊选载、小说和科技说明文来指导学生利用Tips的建议阅读，强化阅读策略训练。
1．8 Checkpoint 2是本单元语言知识的反馈和强化。分为谓语形式和单元话题词汇与句式复习两个部分，此项内容可以作为反馈练习来强化单元知识。
2． 教材重组
2．1 教材的Warming Up和Listening两部分内容相关性很大，Warming Up的材料不仅可以导出单元话题，而且可以利用Warming Up的内容为Listening铺垫必要的语言准备。Workbook部分的Listening practice可以被用来补充更多的单元信息和训练学生的听力能力。因此可以整合这3部分内容，上一节听力课。
2．2 Speaking的内容以Exploration为题，重在培养学生运用思维辨析、判断和决策的能力，组织语言材料的难度较大。但可以借助Warming Up的内容和听力材料为辅助材料，运用Mind-Map教学策略来帮助学生收集材料，降低难度，上一节口语课。
2．3 Pre-reading, Reading和Post-Reading三个教学环节序列性很强，互为补充。Integrating Skills的Talking部分同教材Reading部分内容有很大相关性，整合这4个环节，可以设计一节文化背景输入→阅读→读后反思→读后讨论的流线形精读课。
2．4 LANGUAGE STUDY重在语言知识复习和强化，教学中通过合理设计任务，分类组合，设计一节以语言训练为载体的语言知识学习课。
2．5 INTEGRATING SKILLS 的Reading的内容相对简单，但是在单元教学中作用很大。其内容不仅是对单元话题的拓展，也是对后面写作内容的铺垫。通过精处理，拓展话题理解，训练语言知识，就可以起到承前启后的作用。
2．6 INTEGRATING SKILLS 部分的写作设计是对单元话题的总结。语言的输出方式以Essay载体，以单元主题为话题，既呼应了SPEAKING，又升华了主题。
2．7 Work book 的Integrating Skills分为Reading和Writing两部分内容，Reading的内容同教材部分Reading的内容的文章结构有相似之处，都是对历史事件和历史人物的记叙和评价；Writing以Essay writing 为主题，呼应教材Speaking和Writing部分。因此可以这两部分为载体，上一节综合实践课来强化本单元读写技能的实践运用。
3． 课型设计与课时分配（经教材分析，根据学情，本单元可以用7课时教完）
1st Period Listening
2nd Period Speaking
3rd Period Reading
4th Period Language study
5th Period Extensive reading
6th Period Writing
7th Period Integrating skills
IV.分课时教案
The First Period Listening
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language 目标语言
重点词汇和短语
explore, exploration, discover, discovery, face risks, face challenges, modern means, equipment
2. Ability goals 能力目标
Enable students to learn that exploring in the past and present are quite different.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
Enable students to learn how to compare between the past and present exploring.
Teaching important points 教学重点
Enable students to fully understand the “problem-solution” part in Warming Up and Listening materials.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
By training listening strategies of prediction and doing shorthand, enable students to form a good habit of listening.
Teaching methods 教学方法
1. Team work learning
2. Task-based learning
Teaching aids 教具准备
A projector and some slides
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
Step I Revision (Give reading materials before class)
T: First, let’s check your homework to see how well you have prepared for the class. Now please do the quiz.
Quiz:
1. Who was the first person that mapped the Indian coast?
2. Who was the first person that discovered the “New World”?
3. Why did Abel Tasman sail along the coast of Australia and many islands in the Pacific Ocean?
4. What was James Cook’s purpose of his voyage?
Key:
Zheng He
Columbus
Tasman was to answer questions about the nature of the geography of Pacific Ocean regions during his exploration.
Cook was chosen by the Royal Society of London to undertake a scientific journey to Tahiti to observe and document the event as the planet Venus passed between the earth and the sun. His secret task was to find new landmasses in the south.
StepⅡ Warming Up
Task one: World map exploration
T: Look at the map and tell me how many continents there are in the world. What are they?
Show a world map through slide.
S: There are seven continents in the world. They are Asia, Africa, Europe, Oceania, North America, South America and Antarctic.
T: Observe the map carefully and find their separate positions. Tell me which ocean separates Asia from Oceania, and which separates Europe from America. Then tell me which oceans we have to cross if we take the shortest route from China to the east coast of Africa by sea.
S: The Pacific Ocean separates Asia from Oceania and the Atlantic Ocean separates Europe from America. We have to cross the Pacific Ocean and the Indian Ocean.
Task two: Discuss and answer
T: Work in pairs and discuss the following question?
Question: What were the dangers and challenges that explorers had to face in the past while exploring the world? You can find answers in your reference handout or recall them from your memory.
S: There were a lot of dangers that made their exploration difficult. First, they had to struggle against big storms, icebergs and great rocks that lie unnoticed in the sea. Second, they may easily get ill without fresh vegetables on board. Third, they had to fight against pirates and unfriendly natives.
Task three: List words and expressions
T: Since we have known a lot about exploration at sea, now please recall the words and expressions we just used in talking about exploration. You can also think out these words and expression by using mind-map strategy.
Students recall the words by using mind-map strategy and make the following list.
Item
Language
Words with the meaning
exploration and discovery Make a discovery, expedition,
explore the unknown, exploration
Purposes and experiences in the course of an expedition Do scientific research, map the coast, find a new landmass, discover an island, hit a rock, meet with storms, fight against the natives, land, hide in a harbor
Transport and communication
set out for, set sail for, on board, by sea, on deck, by radio, by flag language, by telephone
Step III Pre-listening
Task one: Prediction
T: Now we are going to hear an interview between a reporter and a professor about exploring in the past and at present. Before listening, please think what sort of questions the reporter will ask and list at least three questions.
S: He may ask the following three questions. 1. What communicating tools did they use in the past? 2. How did they store enough fresh water? 3. How did they deal with sickness in the course of exploration in the past?
T: If the reporter raises the above questions, what examples will the professor give to answer the questions?
S: He may give an example of a great explorer and explain the questions.
Task two: Question and answer
T: What modern means can explorers make use of today?
S: They can send messages by radio and take pictures with advanced cameras in space travel. They can also use robots and other advanced equipment to accomplish some dangerous tasks.
Step IV While-Listening
Task one: Listen for the first time and fill in the chart
T: In the tape you are going to hear the differences of communication and transport used in the past and at present. Listen to the tape and fill the chart of exercise 2 on page 11.
Students listen and do the excercise.
Task two: Do shorthand
T: Listen to the tape for the second time and fill in the chart below. Before that you had better read the questions of exercise 3 carefully.
Students listen to the tape and do shorthand.
Risks in the past
Solutions for modern explorers having no map
Similarities between the past expeditions and trips to Mars
Step V Post-listening
Task one: Discussion
T: Exploration means advancement. It was Armstrong’s first step on the moon that enables people to know what the real moon is like. Meanwhile, explorations are not without dangers and challenges. Recall your early experiences or choose one topic from the teacher’s list to discuss what dangers or difficulties you may have in the course of exploration. Work in groups of four and list all the possible dangers or difficulties. After that, please find out possible solutions to the problems.
Teacher’s list:
Situations
Exploring an uninhabited (无人居住的) island
Going through a cave
Discover a special plant
Students discuss in groups and try to find out possible solutions.
S: Take exploring an uninhabited island as an example, we may meet the following dangers and difficulties and we have found out possible solutions to them, as is shown in the below.
Dangers and difficulties Solutions
We may meet with big waves on the voyage Prepare a boat strong enough and listen to weather forecast before hand
We may get lost in the island Take a compass and make marks along the way
We may find it difficult to make meals Prepare enough food and fresh water and take some matches
We may be attacked by the snakes Prepare a safe sleeping bag and some medicines
Step Ⅵ Listening practice
Task one: Choose the best answers
T: Listen to the tape for the first time and do exercise 2 on page 153.
Students go through the requirement before listening and listen to get the answers.
Task two: Listen and answer questions
T: Listen to the tape for the second time and do exercise 3 on page 153.
Students go through the requirement before listening and find answers to the questions.
Step VII Homework
Task one: Use the following words to make short phrases (eg: evaluate-evaluate the situation)
Words and expressions: evaluate, various, make a decision, in the name of, solve the energy problem, be rich in, take possession of, damage, disturb, available
Task two: Interview some of your classmates and find out if they would like to take part in “A Trip to an Uninhabited Small Island”. Then write a small passage showing different opinions and their reasons. At the end of the passage, you should express your own reason and opinion.
Sample key:
Yesterday I made a survey among my classmates to see if they would like to take part in a trip to an uninhabited island. Their opinions are divided.
About 60% of the students agree to take apart in the exploration. Some believe that exploration will build up their courage. Some girls think the exploration will make their experience richer. And most students are curious about it and take it a good chance to test their ability of independence.
About 40% of students disagree with the idea. The main reason is that it is too dangerous. The rest of the students take no interest in such activities.
From my point of view, I think life means to experience. And we can be more independent only when we take a positive attitude towards everything. Therefore, I will take part in it.
The Second Period Speaking
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language目标语言
a. 重点词汇和短语
evaluate, various, make a decision, in the name of, solve the energy problem, be rich in, take possession of, damage, disturb, available
b. 交际用语
Expressions used to express opinions:
From my understanding, I find it possible that…
In my opinion, nobody has the right to…
For the sake of…, I believe…
In respect for…, we should…
Everything has two sides, but I …
By no means should we …
From my point of view, …
2. Ability goals能力目标
a. Enable students to properly express ideas and opinions.
b. Enable students to collect facts or examples to support their opinions.
3. Learning ability goals学能目标
Teach students learn how to express their opinions and ideas in daily life.
Teaching important points 教学重点
Learn to collect enough information for speaking by brainstorming.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
How to prepare for a debate.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Task-based learning
Debating strategy
Co-operative learning
Teaching aids 教具准备
A projector and some slides
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
Step I Revision
Task one: Read and review the words and expressions
T: First let’s check your homework and read the following phrases.
evaluate the situation, various solutions, make a decision, in the name of the Chinese emperor, solve the energy problem, be rich in all kinds of resources, take possession of the land, damage the relic, disturb the sleeping child, everything is available
Students read and consolidate the words and expressions.
Step II Lead-in
Task one: Get familiar with the topic
T: Read the third topic of Speaking on page 11 and find what is talked about in the situation.
Students read the third situation carefully and find the topic.
S: The topic should be: Can We Use Robots to Take the Place of Human Beings?
Step III Language preparation
Task one: Collect information (brainstorm)
T: After knowing what the topic is, let’s find enough information to carry out our talk on the topic. Now please look at these questions and show your opinions.
Questions:
1. Can robots do all the jobs that human beings can do?
2. Can human beings live like robot on the planet of the Mars?
3. Why didn’t the scientists of the USA send robots instead of Armstrong and his two co-workers to the moon?
4. What possible dangers will human beings meet on the Mars?
5. Is the sacrifice worth doing for the sake of scientific advancement?
6. Are there any space disasters that you have known?
Sample keys:
1. No. Robot can not completely replace the work of human beings.
2. No. Human beings can only live in certain environment with air, water and proper weather, while robots can live in extreme conditions.
3. Because robots couldn’t meet the requirements of scientist at that time.
4. Lack of air and the weather is extremely cold or hot on the surface of the Mars. (All of these may endanger people’s lives.)
5. Science means sacrifice, so it is worth doing for the advancement of science.
6. Russian spaceship crashed and killed several astronauts.
Task Two: Present opinions
T: Work in groups (four in one). Each student presents your opinions to the other three. You are required to use the following phrases in the box below.
1. From my understanding, I find it possible that…
2. In my opinion, nobody has the right to…
3. For the sake of…, I believe…
4. In respect for…, we should…
5. Everything has two sides, but I…
6. By no means should we sacrifice people’s life in the name of science…
Students express their opinions to their group members.
Task Three: List examples or facts
T: Work in pairs and list your reasons to support your opinions. You can do the practice following the sample below.
Sample:
In my opinion, robot can not replace human’s work because of the following reasons. First, … Second, … Third, …
Step IV Discussion and oral practice
Task one: Discussion
T: Work in groups again (four in one). The group leader counts the positive and negative opinions in your group. Then the whole group vote to decide to take only one opinion as your group’s opinion (positive or negative).
Students work in groups and make a decision.
Task two: Collect information
T: Work in groups and try to collect enough information for a debate. You had better list as many examples as possible.
Students work together as a team to collect enough information for a debate.
Step V Debate
Task one: Presentation
T: Now the whole class will be divided into two large groups. One is to take the positive stand and the other is to take the negative stand. Those who take the positive stand will be in group A. And those who take negative stand will be in group B. Next you should take the following process to do the debate. Look at the chart below and see what the whole process is.
Process Ⅰ
1. Each group chooses a representative and a sectary to do shorthand.
2. The representative from group A (positive group) presents the entire group’s opinions and reasons.（each student is limited to 1 minute）
3. The representative from group B (negative group) presents the entire group’s opinions and reasons.（each student is limited to 1 minute）
Students do presentation by following the process above.
Task two: Debate
T: Two groups debate with each other by using the examples and facts you have collected just now. But each debater has to be brief and come to the point.
Students debate with each other.
Process Ⅱ (the sectary do shorthand)
1. Debater A states opinion and presents examples or facts.
2. Debater B states opinion and facts to argue with debater A.
Task three: Conclusion
T: In the course of debate each debater did a good job. Now each group is required make a conclusion speech.
Each group chooses a person to make a conclusion speech.
Process Ⅲ
1. The representative from group A makes conclusion speech.
2. The representative from group B makes conclusion speech.
Sample conclusion speech:
Group A:
Science means to explore and research, while on the other hand, only those who are devoted to science can make great achievement in the scientific field. As part of scientific research, exploration is dangerous and it challenges people’s courage, endeavor and spirit to sacrifice. It was the braveness of the early explorers that made people discover “the New World”. But in their course of expeditions, many people lost their lives because of the storms, sickness and lack of fresh water. In space travel human beings are making progress day by day. But if there were no Armstrong, we would not know what the real moon is like. In conclusion, robots can help people do a lot of things, but they can not completely replace human’s courage and wisdom.
Group B:
Robots are ideal alternatives to replace human beings to accomplish the task on the Mars. First, the extreme condition makes it impossible for humans to land on it. Therefore, it is not ripe for human to land on the Mars. Second, lives are always valuable, and we should avoid unnecessary sacrifice since robots are perfect alternatives. We should make full use of it. Third, robots can do better jobs in photographing and data analysis. All in all, it is foolish to cause unnecessary deaths since we can avoid it.
Step Ⅵ Homework
Task one: Preview the following words
curious, wealthy, in exchange for, central position, ambassador, existence, accurate, exist, ripe, command, renew, expedition
Task two: Read the handout and remember as much background information of Reading as possible.
Reference: The other two topics can also be designed to follow the process below.
Language preparation
Discussion
Debate/solution
Design of topic 1:
Topic: Can space explorers of the future take possession of other planets or resources on those planets?
Language preparation:
1. Can we use “first come, first served” principle in space exploration?
2. Is space exploration very expensive?
3. What should we do first if we colonize other planets?
4. Will exploration lead to fierce competition among countries?
5. Will opening up the planet spoil their natural appearance?
6. Is it equal for all the countries on the earth if only a few countries can take possession of the planet just because they are the first to land on it?
7. If so, will fierce competition cause wars?
Keys:
1. It is true, because there is no international law for us to adhere and we have to use natural principle.
2. Yes, space exploration research costs a lot. And the first country has to invest large sums of money before they land on the planet.
3. They have to spend great effort to open up it and make it possible for human beings to live in it.
4. Yes. However, competition among those able countries may lead to greater progress.
5. Yes, it surely will.
6. No, it is unequal.
7. Yes, it will cause wars just as it did when Europeans began their exploration on the sea.
Discussion: …
Conclusion speeches:
Sample one:
First come, first served. So I believe the first country who has reached the land has the right to take possession of the planet and its resources.
For one reason, the first country has to invest large sums of money on the project on the research before they can send human beings to the Mars or other planets. It’s reasonable for the first country to make up for their expense. For another, if space explorers take possession of the land, it will take them great effort to open up and colonize it. If they are not allowed to take possession of the land, they will lack interest in the work. Lastly, if space explorers are encouraged to own the land, this will lead to competitions among countries. Thus space exploration will become prosperous and lead to greater discoveries.
Sample two:
The earth is ours, so are the planets of outside space. From the ancient time human beings had begun to explore the knowledge about the outside space and now we come to know more and more about space. We can’t make it if it were not for the world people’s joint endeavor. Without the accumulated knowledge from the ancient people of the world, the few developed countries would not make it possible to master the technology to land on the Mars. Therefore, it is the world people’s wisdom that makes today’s achievement. If the first country is allowed to take possession of the land on the Mars, it will not be fair other countries that don’t have the technology to explore space. Therefore, it is not right to take possession of other planets or resources on those planets. Besides, if the “owners” begin to open up these planets, they may destroy the natural beauty of these planets. Also it is possible that fierce competitions among countries may lead to wars as they happened before.
The Third Period Reading
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language目标语言
a.重点词汇和短语
curious, wealthy, in exchange for, central position, ambassador, existence, accurate, exist, ripe, command, renew, expedition
b.重点句子
Trade and curiosity have often formed the foundation for mankind’s greatest endeavor. (p12)
Over the next few hundred years, the Swahili kingdoms and the islands off the African coast developed into the world’s trading centre for ivory, spices, rhinoceros horns, shells, animal skins and sugar. (p12)
The Arabic contacts to the African coast led to the next meeting between black people and a Chinese. (p12)
In the eleventh century, the Africans made several voyages to the court of the Song Dynasty. (p12)
2. Ability goals能力目标
a. Enable the students to know Chinese contribution to world exploration in the 15th century.
b. Develop students’ ability of basic reading strategies of bottom-up and top-down.
3. Learning ability goals学能目标
a. Students will understand the great contribution Zheng He had done to the world, thus they may take these national heroes as example and follow them.
b. By using the strategies of bottom-up and top-down, students will learn to generalize and collect information.
Teaching important points 教学重点
The explorers’ great contribution to world trade and economy.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
Guide the students to pick out the main clue of the passage and the development method of the text.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Team work learning.
Task-based learning
Teaching aids 教具准备
A projector and some slides
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
Step I Revision
Task one: Check words and expressions
T: Let’s do a mini cloze test and see how well you prepared for the lesson. (show a slide)
Cloze test:
1. Trade and ____(好奇) have often formed the foundation for mankind’s greatest endeavor.
2. Marco Polo’s stories inspired Christopher Columbus and other European explorers to search for sea route to the distant, ____(富有的) Asian lands.
3. Silk from China found its way over land along the Silk Road to India, the middle east and Rome, ____(来交换) spices and glass.
4. Ceylon, with its ____(中央位置), was the place where Chinese merchants met with Arab merchants and heard about the westernmost lands.
5. Gan Ying, a Chinese ____(大使) went to the east Roman Empire over land.
6. The contacts between China and Africa over the centuries had led to the awareness of each other’s ____(存在).
7. Still no ____(精确的) maps of the countries around Indian Ocean ____(存在) before Zheng He.
8. By the beginning of 15th century the time was ____(成熟).
9.Under the ____(统帅) of Zheng He, the fleets set sail from the south China Sea across the Indian Ocean to the mouth of the Red Sea.
10. Zheng He ____(重建) relations with the kingdoms of the East African coast.
11. The fleets made several ____(远征) before the ____ (探险) was stopped.
Keys: curiosity, wealthy, in exchange for, central position, ambassador, existence, accurate, existed, ripe, command, renewed, expeditions, exploration
Task two: Know about Silk Road
T: Let’s see how much you know about Silk Road. Next please fill the following blanks with suitable words. (show a slide)
Students try to fill the blanks by recalling from memory or referring to the handout.
Exercise:
1. The Silk Road, which is regarded as the greatest ____ (东西贸易通道), was first traveled by Zhang Qian when he was sent on a diplomatic mission to the____ (西方地区) in the Han Dynasty (206 BC-AD 220). The Silk Road was not only for____ (货物) but also for the transmission of ____ (知识和观点) between east and west.
Keys: East-West trade route, Western Regions, goods, knowledge and ideas
Step Ⅱ Lead-in
Task one: Know about great explorers
T: Today we are going to learn a lot about the great explorers in the world. Now let’s have a quiz to check your knowledge about them. Please look at the quiz and tick true or false after your reading. (show a slide)
Students look at the quiz and make judgment.
Quiz:
1. Zheng He was a great explorer of the Ming Dynasty. His expedition to the Indian Ocean was 87 years later than Columbus’s exploration to the Atlantic Ocean. (false)
2. Zheng He’s purpose of expedition was to make trade and show friendship to other lands while Columbus was to seek treasure. (true)
3. Marco Polo’s traveled from Italy to China and they stayed in the Ming court for a long time. After that, they wrote stories about their travels in the Far East. Europeans were so inspired by Marco Polo's accounts that they began searching for sea routes to China, Japan, and the East Indies. (false)
Step Ⅲ Pre-Reading
Task one: Background information input
T: Now please turn to page 12 and look at question 2 and 3 of Pre-reading. Discuss the two questions with your partner, and then I will call three students to come to the front to make three presentations.
Students discuss the two questions in pairs.
Ask three students to make presentations in the front.
Sa: In the Ming Dynasty, the passage to the west, where now the central Asia stands, was controlled by Mongols. When the Mongols’ court was overrun by the Ming government, the two powers were unfriendly to each other. As a result, it was almost impossible for the merchants or ambassadors to cross the passage to the west.
Sb: Gan Ying, a great explorer and ambassador of the Han Dynasty, took the route of the Silk Road over land to accomplish a mission given by the Han emperor. He reached many countries along the Silk Road, though he was not able to arrive at his estimated destination-Da Qin (the west Roman empire).
Sc: Zheng He, a national hero, was famous for his seven voyages across the Indian Ocean, which established China’s rule of the sea in 15th century.
Step Ⅳ While-Reading
Task one: Predicting according to the title (Top-down)
T: Please look at the title of the reading material (Reaching Out Across the Ocean) and guess who reached out across the ocean.
S: Maybe they were China and countries along the Indian Ocean.
T: Why did China reach out across the ocean?
S: They wanted to trade with western lands and show friendship to them.
Task two: Predicting according to the thesis sentence
T: Read the first paragraph carefully and answer the following questions.
Students read quickly and try to find information to answer the questions.
Questions:
1. What formed the foundation of mankind’s interest in exploration?
2. What was Columbus’s purpose of searching for the wealthy Asian lands?
3. Which ocean does the world “western ocean” refer to?
4. Guess who explored the Western Ocean before Columbus.
T: Now I will ask some students to answer these questions.
Sa: Trade and curiosity formed the foundation of mankind’s interest in exploration.
Sb: His purpose of searching was to seek treasure.
Sc: It referred to part of the Pacific Ocean west of Brunei and part of the Indian Ocean along the coast.
Sd: Many people explored the Western Ocean, among whom Zheng He was the most famous.
Task three: Predicting the main idea of the whole passage
T: Work in pairs and predict the main idea of the whole passage according to the title and the first paragraph.
S: My prediction is: The passage is mainly about the explorers from China and other lands who explored the Indian Ocean before Columbus.
Task four: Survey
T: Read paragraph 2 to paragraph 5 and answer the following questions.
Students read carefully and find the information to the questions.
1. In the Han Dynasty, who traveled over land to the East Roman Empire?
2. Between the Han and early the Tang Dynasty, Which part of Africa developed into the world trade centre?
3. During the Tang Dynasty which traveler wrote Record of My Travels?
4. Before the Song Dynasty which means of transport did Chinese travelers mainly use?
5. In the eleventh century, who made several voyages to the court of the Song Dynasty?
Keys:
1. In the Han Dynasty, Gang Ying traveled over land to the East Roman Empire.
2. Between the Han and the early Tang Dynasty, Swahili kingdoms and the islands off the African coast developed into the world trade centre.
3. During the Tang Dynasty Du Huan wrote Record of My Travels.
4. Before the Song Dynasty Chinese travelers mainly traveled over land.
5. In the eleventh century, the Africans made several voyages to the court of the Song Dynasty.
Task five: Generalize the main idea of each paragraph
T: Read paragraph 6 to paragraph 9 and generalize the main idea of each paragraph.
Students read paragraph 6 to paragraph 9 and try to get the main idea of each paragraph.
T: Since you have finished the task, I will call some students to tell which sentence showing the main idea of each paragraph.
S: In paragraph 6, the second sentence shows the main idea of this paragraph. From paragraph 7 to paragraph 9, the first sentences show the main idea of each paragraph.
Task six: Read and build the schema chart of the passage.
T: Read the whole passage again and build the schema chart as below.
Students read the whole passage and build the schema chart.
Schema chart
Title Reaching Out Across the Ocean
Thesis sentence Many great explorers made expeditions across the Indian Ocean long before Columbus, among whom Zheng He was the most prominent.
Main idea
(before Zheng He) P2 China had contacts with countries along the Indian Ocean from the early time, and during ancient time explorers had begun to contact with each other.
P3 Between the Han and the early Tang Dynasty, Swahili kingdoms and the islands off the African coast developed into the world trade centre and attracted merchants from the world.
P4 During the Tang Dynasty, Du Huan, who traveled to many lands, wrote the book Record of My Travels.
P5 In the eleventh century, the Africans made several voyages to the court of the Song Dynasty.
Main idea
(after Zheng He) P6 By the beginning of the fifteenth century the time was ripe for a grand meeting.
P7 In the years between 1405 and 1433, under the command of Zheng He, seven large treasure fleets sailed westwards on voyages of trade and exploration.
P8 Zheng He renewed relations with the kingdoms of the East African coast.
P9 The fleet made several expeditions before the exploration was stopped.
Step Ⅴ Post Reading
Task one: Questions and Answers
T: Look at Post-Reading part and answer questions of exercise one and two.
Sa: Traveling stories and trade made people know about far-away civilizations. Marco Polo’s stories inspired Christopher Columbus and other European explorers to search for sea routes to the distant and wealthy Asian lands. People of Han Dynasty knew about Africa through the mouth of merchants.
Sb: They are east, west, westernmost, eastern and so on. Theses words are used to suggest that the topic of the passage is the communication between the west and the east.
Task two: Fill in the chart
T: Read the requirement of exercise 3 and 4 carefully and fill in the two charts.
Key to exercise 3:
Period Name Way of travel Goods
Han Dynasty Gang Ying Over land Rhinoceros horns
From Han Dynasty to the early Tang Dynasty Ivory, Rhinoceros horns, spices, shells, animal skins, sugar
Tang Dynasty Du Huan Over land and by boat
Song Dynasty By sea A bronze statue of a lion
Ming Dynasty Zheng He By sea Zebras, giraffes, Ivory, Rhinoceros horns, shells
Key to exercise 4:
Goods Africa Africa and Asia
Zebras √
giraffes √
Ivory √
Rhinoceros horns √
shells √
Task three: Paraphrasing (Exercise 5)
T: Paraphrase the phrases and sentences from the text in English using your own words.
Sa: The Africans left the African land and came for a visit to China by sea.
Sb: In the Ming Dynasty both China and the eastern coast countries became very prosperous, and there came the great need for state-to-state contact.
Sc: The part of ocean where the Red Sea meets the Indian Ocean.
Sd: For a short period of time, China held the power of sea for she had large navy, experienced sailors and an excellent admiral-Zheng He.
Task four: discussion
T: Read the requirement of exercise 6 of Post reading, and discuss it with your partner. After that I will call some students to show your opinions.
Students discuss with their partner and come to a conclusion.
Sa: The symbolic meaning is that by trading they built friendly relations. The peaceful communication led to the mutual understanding of each other beyond the basic knowing of each other’s existence.
Sb: Before the USA and China renewed their diplomatic relationship in the late 1970s, China invited the American table tennis delegation to visit China for a friendship match. After the event, the USA expressed her willingness to establish diplomatic relationship with China. Later the event was called Ping-Pang diplomacy.
Step Ⅵ Discussion
Task one: Read and discuss
T: Turn to page 154 and look at Talking. Read the short passage and find out the topic to be talked about.
S: The passage is about the development and influence of Zheng He’s achievement.
T: History develops in two ways, and different choices may result in different outcomes. Discuss with your partner and find out what are the two different outcomes. Then please raise some questions following the examples below.
Students discuss and think out different outcomes.
1. What if China was the first to discover Australia?
2. What if Chinese first settled in Australia and America before the westerners?
3. What if Chinese continued trade with the western world in a large scale after Zheng
He’s expedition?
4. What if Chinese began to run restaurants in Europe in 1800s?
5. What if in most part of the world people can speak Chinese?
6. What if Chinese set up Chinese clinics in Europe after Zheng He’s exploration?
Task two: Discuss and explore
T: Look at the second topic and find out more possibilities.
Students read the requirement and find more possibilities following the sample.
Possible answers:
1. If China had continued to sail further down the African coast, China might have discovered the way to the west Europe. Through continuous contact with the west, China could have established embassy relationship with the westerner.
2. If China had continued to explore to the south and across the Pacific Ocean, she might be the first to discover Australia and America. This way, Chinese might be the dominant language around the world.
3. If China had opened her door earlier as in 1400s, she might have suffered greater loss and have been invaded by the westerners earlier.
Step Ⅶ Homework
Do a project: Before the Song Dynasty, most of Chinese explorers went to other lands over land. But since the Song Dynasty, people began to seek routes to other lands by sea. Make use of the Internet or other resources to find out the reasons.
The Fourth Period Language Study
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language目标语言
a. 重点词汇和短语
discover, original, equipment, correct, inspect, evaluate, possess, contribute, ignore, competition, existence, wealthy, accurate, royal
b. 语法
Review the predicate
2. Ability goals 能力目标
Review the predicate and let students be exact in the use of the Predicate.
3. Learning Ability Goals 学能目标
Teach students learn how to distinguish different types of Predicate and how to use them properly.
Teaching important points 教学重点
Different types of Predicate.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
By reviewing the predicate, get students to establish a sense of exactness in using the voices and tenses.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Team work learning
Task-based learning
Repetition and practice
Teaching aids 教具准备
A projector and some slides
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
Step I Revision
T: Good morning/afternoon. Homework first! Have you searched on the Internet or consult other sources? Who’d like to give us the reason?
Sample key:
The Silk Road was the most important route that connected Asian and European countries. It began to exert its function in the Han Dynasty. After the Tang Dynasty, it began to fall partly because the later courts in China were not strong enough. In Song Dynasty, her relationship with other minority governments was very tense, and they always made wars with Song Dynasty. Because of her weakness in power and the continuous wars, most Han people migrated to the south to seek a well-being life. As a result, the economic centre began to slowly transfer from the north to the south since then. During this period, the main passages to European countries were controlled by other minority powers and it was difficult for Song’s people to travel by road. The need to find a route by sea was urgent, thus the Sea Silk Road gradually took the place of the old Silk Road over land.
StepⅡ Word Study
T: Now please turn to page 14 and do exercise one.
After students finish the exercise, check the answers with the whole class.
T: Next, let’s look at exercise two. Before you do it individually, let’s read all the sentences and see what part of speech is needed in each blank. Then please fill in the blanks with the right form of the word.
After students finish the exercise.
T: Let’s check to see how well you have done it. Next we will move to exercise 3. Exercise 3 is a short passage about Zheng He’s voyage to the western Ocean. Choose the appropriate words or phrases from the box to fill in the blanks.
After students finish the exercise
T: Let’s check together.
Deal with exercise on workbook.
T: Please turn to page 156 and look at exercise 4 of Word Study. Translate the following sentences into English, using the phrases in brackets.
After students finish the exercise
T: Let’s check it one by one. The first one, any volunteer?
…
Step III Grammar Study
Task one: Underlining and explaining
T: Look at exercise 1 of Grammar on page 15. Please underline the predicate in the following sentences and explain what type of predicate it is.
Students underline the predicate in each sentence and distinguish what voice and tense is being used in each sentence.
Task two: Complete the passage with proper form of the verbs.
T: Exercise 2 is a passage about the height of the Silk Road in the Tang Dynasty. Try to get as much information as possible while filling in the blanks with the proper forms of words in the bracket.
Students finish the task in required time.
Task three: Complete the following answers by adding the Predicate.
T: Look at exercise 1 of Grammar on page 156. Work in pairs and complete the following answers.
Students work in pairs and finish the exercises.
Step IV Homework
Task one: Finish exercises 1 to 3 on page 155 and exercises 2 to 3 on page 157.
Task two: Preview Reading part of Integrating Skills.
The Fifth Period Extensive reading
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language目标语言
a. 重点词汇和短语
conquer, accomplish, apart from, unable, survive, sacred, strength, expedition, contain, run out, aircraft, arise, attempt, evidence, praise
b. 重点句子
All that was left to be conquered was the “third pole”, the highest mountain on earth, Mount Qomolangma.
Climbing at such high altitudes requires great skill and is not without risk.
Sherpa’s strength skill, honesty and dedication have made them ideal companions on the mountain.
One of the first foreign expeditions to climb Mount Qomolangma arrived in Tibet in 1921, but at the time they had no idea what they were up against.
The Chinese made their first successful attempt in 1960.
2. Ability goals 能力目标
Enable students to learn about the exploring of the Mount Qomolangma home and abroad.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
Understand the real meaning of exploring and mountain-climbing and learn to challenge oneself in real life.
Teaching important points 教学重点
How to answer question 3 of Post reading.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
Generalize the whole passage by picking out key information.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Team work learning
Task-based learning
Teaching aids 教具准备
A projector and some slides
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
Step I Revision (Check homework-task one and two)
T: First I will check your homework. First, let’s deal with exercises on workbook.
Check the answers with the whole class.
…
StepⅡ Lead-in
Task one: Discussion
T: Before we study the passage, we will have a discussion. The topic is: What difficulties and dangers will a person face when he climbs Mount Qomolangma?
Students work in pairs and come to a conclusion.
S: The climbers will face the cold, thin air and low oxygen levels. Besides, continuous bad weather may endanger the climbers’ lives. Worse still, they may meet with snow collapse, which is fatal. Lastly, there will be no chance to survive if the oxygen runs out.
T: You are right. Even if there are so many dangers and difficulties, pioneers were courageous and many of them have conquered Mount Qomolangma.
Step III While-reading
Task one: Predict the content
T: Before reading the text, tell me what are needed to conquer Mount Qomalangma.
S: Besides all the necessary equipment and preparations, it needs the climber’s skill, courage, strong will and wisdom.
T: Look at the title and answer the questions.
Questions:
1. What does “going high” mean?
2. What is the passage going to talk about? The pioneers or the third pole?
Sa: In my opinion, going high means climbing the mountains.
Sb: I think the passage is going to talk about the pioneers.
Task two: Read and check information
T: Please read the first two paragraphs and answer the 3 questions of exercise 1 on page 17.
After a few minutes
Sa: “The third pole” means that Mount Qomolangma can be compared with the North Pole and the South Pole for its extreme conditions.
Sb: First, both the North Pole and the South Pole lie in the southernmost and northernmost points of the world, while Mount Qomolangma is the highest mountain in the world. Second, like the North Pole and the South Pole, people find it hard to conquer because its extreme conditions.
Sc: Tibet is rich in high mountains and to this point there are hundreds of mountains that can be called the third poles. All these mountains are high and difficult to conquer because of their extreme conditions.
Task three: Questions and answers
T: Read from paragraph 3 to paragraph 5 and answer the following questions.
1. Why can the Tibetans live at ease in such extreme conditions?
2. What makes Sherpas the most reliable guide in every attempt to climb Mount Qomolangma?
3. What might have been the possible reasons that made British expeditions fail in 1922 and in 1924?
4. Why could Edmund Hillary and Tenzing Norgay make it to the summit of Mount Qomolangma?
5. How do you understand the sentence “Like winning in the Olympic Games, climbing a mountain such as Mount Qomolangma is a great personal achievement”?
6. After the first successful climbing, why did so many people still want to climb Mount Qomolangma?
Sample keys:
1. Tibetans can live at ease in such extreme conditions because they have lived in Himalayas for centuries and have adjusted to the conditions at such a height.
2. Sherpas’ strength, skill, honesty and dedication have made them the most reliable guide.
3. They were not prepared to many unexpected difficulties and they were not very familiar with Mount Qomolangma.
4. After World War Two, technological advances in clothing and equipment had been made and more was known about the mountain itself.
5. Mountain climbing itself means exploring human possibilities and every success proves the conqueror’s courage, endeavor and ability.
6. Different people represent different countries and different “number ones”.
Task four: Survey
T: Read from paragraph 6 to paragraph 7 and finish the following cloze.
Cloze:
The Chinese ___(首次成功攀登) in 1960. The team members ___(包括) Gongbu, Wang Fuzhou and Qu Yinhua. It was dark when they ___(到达顶峰). Thus they ___(没能够拍到照片) to produce evidence. On their return, they ___(被颂扬为) as national heroes. On May 27, 1975, another team ___(到达顶峰) of Mount Qomolangma from its northern side. Over the past 40 years, 29 other Chinese people___(已经攀登) Mount Qomolangma.
Keys: made their first successful attempt, included, reached the summit, were unable to take photos, were praised, arrived at the peak, have climbed
Step IV Scanning
Task one: Build the schema chart
T: You are required to build the schema char according to chart below.
Students scan the text and build the schema chart.
Sample chart:
Title
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
Keys:
Title Going High: the Pioneers of the Third Pole
P1 By the middle of 1920s, Mount Qomolangma remained to be greatest challenge for human beings.
P2 Climbing Mount Qomolangma was dangerous and it seemed almost impossible because of its extreme conditions.
P3 Sherpas prove to be the ideal guide since the first attempt.
P4 Though several attempt failed in 1920s, Edmund Hillary and Tenzing Norgay made their first successful attempt to the summit in 1953.
P5 After the first successful attempt to conquer Mount Qomolangma, it remains man’s great challenges until now.
P6 The Chinese successfully reached the summit of it in 1960.
P7 Over the past 40 years, other 29 Chinese reached the summit for scientific research or sport.
Step V Post Reading
Task one: Paraphrasing
T: Please turn to page 17 and look at exercise 2. Explain the following phrases and sentences from the text in English. (pair work)
Sa: Going to Mount Qomolangma was regarded as difficult as going to the moon.
Sb: The death zone means that people find it almost impossible to live in the area.
Sc: They didn’t know what conditions were to be faced with.
Sd: English air refers to oxygen.
Task two: Questions and answers
T: Look at exercise 3 and 4, and find answers to the two questions.
Sa: In spite of the first successful attempt, there still exist many other “first attempts” to be proved and other scientific work to be done.
Sb: They left behind an iron container with the national flag and a portrait of Chairman Mao Zedong.
Step Ⅵ Homework
Task one: Recite the important sentences. (refer to Target Language)
Task two: Do a project.
Requirement: List the advantages and disadvantages that the Internet has brought to us by referring to the sample chart.
Sample chart:
Advantages
Disadvantages
Writer’s opinion
The Sixth Period Writing
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target Language目标语言
a. 重点词汇和短语
possibility, achievement, characteristic, argue, struggle against, have nothing to do with, rely on, natural process, compare, spoil, the use of technology, lower the value of, instead of spoiling, the value of
b. 交际用语
Expressions used to make decisions:
It’s hard to decide… however.
Take everything into consideration, I …
In spite of …, I still believe…
I am likely to think… because…
My choice will be…
2. Ability goals 能力目标
a. Enable students to master two kinds of useful strategies used in writing: Opinion → examples; Opinion → facts.
b. Get students learn to write a persuasive essay by following the following process: language preparation ( presenting opinions → list facts or examples) → writing → improvement.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
Learn how to write a persuasive essay by following a certain process.
Teaching important points 教学重点
By using stimulation strategy (language preparation), collect the needed sentence structures and words.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
Intensify students’ ability to use mind-map strategy to collect information.
Teaching methods 教学方法
a. Team work learning.
b. Task-based learning
Teaching aids 教具准备
A projector and some slides
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
Step I Revision
Check recitation of important sentences. (Homework-task one of the 5th period)
Check the project（homework-task two of the 5th period）
T: Every coin has two sides. Take the Internet as an example, it brought both advantages and disadvantages. On one hand, it brought us a lot of benefits and has made our life more exciting. On the other hand, it has brought problems if people don’t make proper use of it. Like the Internet, technology brings us not only good, but also controversial problems. Hope you can make proper use of Internet in your daily life.
Sample keys:
Advantages 1. Since there is a lot of information on line, you can surf the Internet for any information you need in a short time without working hard in the library.
2. It is also very convenient to communicate with others by using the Internet.
3. The Internet makes our life more colorful and exciting.
Disadvantages 1. There is some information on line that is not good for the students.
2. Spending too much time playing games on line will not only have a bad effect on study but also do harm to our health.
3. Cybersex and on-line gambling have become drugs for many lonely people.
Writer’s opinion Make proper use of the Internet and learn to separate good plants from wild weeds.
Step II Language preparation
Task one: Fact and conclusion
T: Look at the fact box and discuss with your partner. First get familiar with the two facts and try to think hard to find what opinion the two facts support. After discussion, please come to a conclusion and show different opinions that the two facts support.
Fact box:
1. The Tibetans have lived in the Himalayas for centuries and they have adjusted to the extreme conditions.
2. In 1924, two British men were lost when their oxygen ran out.
Students discuss with their partners.
T: Since you have discussed it for some time, you may have come to different opinions. Now you are required to use the following phrases to present your opinions that you have concluded from the two facts.
Expressions used to make decisions:
It’s hard to decide … however.
Take everything into consideration, I …
In spite of …, I still believe…
I am likely to think… because…
My choice will be…
Sa: Mountain climbing is dangerous and climbers have to face a lot of other dangers besides the cold and thin air. But according to my knowledge, people can only survive above the death zone for a few days even with extra oxygen. In spite of fact that Tibetans have survived in such extreme conditions for centuries, I still believe it is almost impossible for the climbers from other regions to climb Mount Everest without extra oxygen.
Sb: Since Tibetans have lived in Himalayas for centuries. It is possible for other people to adjust to such high attitude if they follow a natural process of training. Take the fact into consideration, I think that two British men were lost because they were not well prepared before their climbing.
Task two: List facts and examples
T: Here is one topic for us to list the positive and negative examples or facts. “In space travel should we use robots to take the place of human beings?” Our class will be divided into two groups. Group A will list the positive examples or facts and group B will list the facts or examples to support the negative opinions.
Sa: I think we should use robot to take the place of human beings for the following reasons. First, robots can make the job easier. Second, robot will make the exploration safer without risking people’s lives. Third, robots do better job than human, because they can be more exact in collecting and analyzing data.
Sb: I think we should not use robots to take the place of human beings because space travel explores human’s possibilities. Space travel tests people’s courage, endeavor and ability. If we use robots we will become too dependent on them and lose courage in space exploration. Take Apollo’s landing on the Moon as an example, if it were not Armstrong and his co-workers, we would not know what the moon is really like.
Step III Pre-writing
T: Read the narrative part of writing on page 18 and try to get very familiar with what the two different opinions are. Then I will call two students to tell me what they are?
Sa: One opinion supports that the use of equipment spoils or lowers the value of human achievement in sports and exploration.
Sb: The negative opinion is that the use of equipment doesn’t spoil or lower the value of human achievement in sports and exploration.
List facts or examples to support the positive or negative opinion (pair work)
T: Work in pairs and list facts or examples to support the positive or negative opinion by using the mind-map strategy.
Students discuss and list facts and examples.
Student’s mind-map chart:
Task three: presentation
T: I will show two students’ works to the whole class. You can check if their examples or fact support their opinion.
Use two slides to show one positive chart and one negative chart.
Step IV While-wring
Task one: Write opinion sentences by following the chart.
T: Now please write at least three sentences showing opinions by following the chart.
Positive opinion
Negative opinion
Writer’s opinion(student)
After a few minutes
T: Next please write down the facts and examples to support your opinions. You are required to organize the passage by using a three-paragraph pattern.
Sample
Does the Use of Equipment Spoil or
Lower the Value of Human Achievement
With the advancement of social development, technology has become more and more important in every field of society. In science exploration, the use of all kinds of equipment has become so widespread that it causes heated discussion among people. Some experts argue that the wide use of equipment lowers people’s achievement in exploration. They believe that technology will take away the fun of risk in exploration. It is the fun which lies in exploration that continuously stimulates people’s curiosity about it. And the curiosity always impels the advancement of science development. Besides, in the course of exploration, there will be the unknown and challenges. All these that lie ahead test human’s courage and endeavor. If science exploration is too dependent on equipment, people will lose the pleasure of showing their courage and endeavor in exploration. Therefore, the use of equipment minimize people’s ability and makes people fell unable in face of the advanced equipment. And all the advancement achieved seems to be from the equipment, not by the effort of human beings.
On the other hand, some experts argue that, instead of lower human’s achievement, the use of equipment makes human achieve greater progress. With advanced equipment, many dangerous jobs will become safe and possible. What’s more, some equipment can make many kinds of work easier and faster. Owning to oxygen, the climbers made it possible to reach the summit of Qomolangma. Taking all these reasons into consideration, we can not walk faster in the field science exploration without the use of advanced equipment.
In my opinion, we live in a world with technology all around us. We can
篇13：Unit 5 Getting the message(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
Period 1 New words and expressions
Teaching aims and demands:
(1) To learn some words and expressions .
(2) To use the words and expressions correctly
1 advertise ___________
advertisement ___________
advertising ____________
advertiser ____________
advertise a soap _____________
advertise for a new secretary _____________
eg: (1) Amy saw _____in a local newspaper a teaching post at a high school close to where she lived.
A advertised B advertises C advertising D advertisement
(2) Nowadays,some stars like _____because they can _____a lot of money.
A advertisements;bring B advertising;make C to advertise; earn D making advertisements make
2 consider v ___________ 考虑干-----
____________ 认为-------
consideration n ________
considering prep__________
eg (1) 你应该考虑到你的健康状况.___________________________________
(2)______ he has only just started ,he knows a lot about it.
A Considering B Considered C To consider
consideration n
(1). 考虑[U][(+for/to)]
That matter is_____________________________那件事正在考虑之中。
Before writing your answers please give careful consideration ___the questions. 请在回答之前仔细考虑一下问题。
(2.) 需要考虑的事;动机,原因[C]
Price and quality are the two chief considerations.
价格和质量是两个主要考虑的问题。
(3). 体贴;关心[U][(+for)]
He __________________________________his wife. 他不体贴他的妻子。
词组： in consideration of=in return for/ on account of/ because of ______________ take---into consideration=take account of/ take…into account ___________
under consideration___________ on no consideration ___________ out of consideration for________________
You take quality into consideration. 您必须要考虑到质量问题
We must take into consideration our ability to pay when we import goods.
我们进口必须考虑我们的支付能力。
I always take fuel consumption（消耗） into consideration when buying a car. 我买汽车时总要把燃油消耗量考虑在内.
We may take into consideration accepting government-to-government or non-government loans（ 贷款）only if the conditions permit. （注意宾语后置） 只要条件合适，我们可以考虑接受政府间贷款或非政府间贷款。
under consideration在考虑中，在研究中
3 charge (1) 使---充满 a voice _______with tension
(2) 控告,指控 charge----with
(3)要价,收费 charge--- for
(4)记在 ---帐上
(5)使承担：使承担任务、责任或义务：charge sb to do/charge sb with
They charged him with the task of watching the young swimmers.
他们让他承担起看护年轻游泳者的任务
n (1) 主管,看管 _________________(由----掌管)
___________________(在---掌管下)
(2) 费用,价钱 _____________________(免费的)
(3) in charge 最常见用法是作后置定语，也作表语；表示主管的，负责的：
the person__________负责人；
the officer__________ 主管警官；
Who is in charge here? 这里谁负责？
eg (1) How much did the hotel charge you _______a room for the night?
(2) The police charged him ______careless driving.
(3) It is said that he is the manager of the company.In other words ,the company is ______________him.
4 blame blame sb for sth
blame sth on sb
be to blame
eg (1) ---Who is ______for the accident?
A to blame B to be blamed
(2) Don’t blame it_____,___________.别怪他,该怪我。
They __________________________George.他们把失败归咎于乔
(3)They blamed the secretary for the delay of the plan.
他们怪罪秘书造成计划延误。
5 appeal v (1)恳求,呼吁 appeal to sb for sth /to do
(2) 对---有吸引力,感兴趣 sth/sb appeal to sb
(3) 上诉 appeal to ----against
eg: (1)对露营这种想法我从来不感兴趣________________________
(2) 他不服判决而向高级法院上诉_________________________
政府呼吁每个人要节约用水________________________________
appeal n 呼吁,请求；上诉
He made one last appeal___ his father___ forgive him.
他最后一次恳求父亲宽恕他。
an appea_____ forgiveness
恳求原谅
The teacher listened to his appeal.
老师倾听了他的要求。
6 keep an eye out of ___________
keep an eye on ___________
keep watch ____________
keep back _____________
keep out _____________
keep off ______________
keep up _______________
keep up with ______________
keep---from doing _______________
eg (1) The boss _________100$ from my salary with no good reasons.
(2) It is important for us to _________a good state of mind when we take an important exam.
(3)_______the dog ,It might bite you.
7 attach---to ---- 系在,附在; 与---有联系
be attached to 迷恋,依恋
eg (1) He bought a house with a garage ______at a low price.
(2) Do you attach any importance _____what he said?
(3) We have grown _____to the old house and would hate to move.
8 convey vt. -veyed, -veying
(1). 运送,搬运,转运[(+from/to)]
Passengers are conveyed by bus to the air terminal.
用公共汽车载送旅客前往航空站。
The truck conveyed machinery across the country.
这辆卡车在全国各地运送机器。
( 2.) 传播(声音等)
A wire conveys an electric current.电线传导电流。
Wires convey electricity.金属线导电。
(3). 传达,传递,表达[(+to)][+(that)][+wh-]
I found________________________________ 我觉得难以用言语表达我的感情。
I will convey the information to him.我将把这消息通知他。
If you'll leave a message, I'll convey it to him. 如果你愿意留下口信，我会转告他的。
(4). 转让(财产等)[(+to)]
老农夫将其农场转让给儿子________________________________________.
比较：convey， carry， transport， transmit
这些动词，当它们指人或物从一个地方向另一个地方运动时，可相互比较。
convey 常常含有持续、有规律地运动或流动的意思。
carry 适用范围很广，但常常表示运动时支撑着某物：
The train carries baggage, mail, and passengers. 火车运送行李、邮件及乘客。
transport 主要限于人或有形物体的常常是长距离的运动：
Huge tankers are used to transport oil.用巨型油轮来运输石油。
The city uses buses to transport students to school.这城市用公共汽车载送学生去学校。
transmit 指经过、发送或传播某物：
Please transmit the stock certificates by special messenger.
请通过特种邮件投递将股票票证寄来。
The cost of transmitting books by air is very high.空运书籍的费用很高。
Period 2 Warming up
Teaching aims and demands:
(1)To improve the Ss’speaking and listening skills
Teaching procedure:
Step 1 Disscussion
SB p37 Let the Ss disscuss the questions in the text then check the answers with the Ss.
Step 2 Listening
Listen to the tape and finish the exercise on page 38
Step 3 Speaking
Divide the Ss into several groups to disscuss and let them report their ideas to the class
Period 3 Reading
Teaching aims and demands:
(1)To get general ideas of the passage
(2)To improve the Ss’ reading skill
(3)To learn some knowledge about advertising
Teaching procedue
Step 1 Pre-reading
Disscussion : Disscuss the advantages and disadvantages of advertisements.
How can we make good use of good ads?
Fill in the form on page 39
Step 2 While reading
Read the text quickly and try to get general idea of each paragraph
Paragraph 1________________________________________________
Paragraph 2________________________________________________
Paragraph 3_________________________________________________
Paragraph4-6 _______________________________________________
Paragraph 7_________________________________________________
Paragroph 8_________________________________________________
Step 3 Careful-reading
Questions:
(1) How do people react to ads?And why?
___________________________________________________________
(2) what is the basic principle of advertising?
___________________________________________________________
(3) What are the advantages of advertising?
____________________________________________________________
(4) How bad ads mislead consumers?
____________________________________________________________
(5) How can we protect ourselves from false ads?
§1.1细枝末节
1.The development of media has gone hand ___ hand____ the development of advertising.
A.by;by B.by;with C.in;with D.in;by
2.People react to advertisements in different ways.Because .
A.ads are useful and entertaining to some people while annoying to others
B.ads are useful and entertaining
C.ads are annoying
D.ads are not only useful and entertaining but annoying
3.When we buy an expensive product, can help us make the right decision.
A.sellers B.ads C.our friends D.defenders
4.“Not all ads are used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits” means .
A.all ads are used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits
B.few ads are used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits
C.no ads are used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits
D.all ads are not used to promote a product or to increase a company’s profits
5.In order not to become easy target for ad makers,we must .
A.distinguish between fiction and facts B.watch TV more often
C.believe all the ads D.never believe any ads
6.The best chance to reach customers for the advertisers is to .
A.appeal to their emotions B.make interesting pictures
C.give customers proper prices D.send messages to customers
§1.2主旨大意
7.Paragraph 4 is mainly about .
A.ads must increase the production
B.ads must reduce the price of the production
C.ads must help companies and customers
D.ads must make a product more expensive
8.Which sentence tells us the main idea of Paragraph 5?
A.The most important function of advertising is to introduce the prices of the products.
B.The most important function of advertising is to introduce the types of the products.
C.The most important function of advertising is to introduce new products.
D.The most important function of advertising is to introduce the company where the products come from.
9.Why is advertising popular?
A.Because ads are found in newspapers.
B.Because ads are found on the Internet.
C.Because ads are found on TV.
D.Because ads are found everywhere.
§1.3推理判断
10.We can infer from the last sentence of the text that .
A.we must learn to believe ads B.we must learn to accept ads
C.we must learn to analyse ads D.we must learn to accuse ads
Step 4 Post-reading
Answer the following questions
1 Why is advertising popular?
2 How dose advertising help consumers and companies?
3 Why do advertisers often have to work to attract people’s attention?
4 What is a “bait-and-switch” ad?
5 Make a list of advantages and disadvantages.
Period 4 Language points in reading
Teaching aims and demands:
(1) To learn and grasp some important phrases in the text
(2) To learn some important language points
Learing the following points
1 hand in hand
(1)手拉手地
(2)密切联系
小男孩和他母亲手拉手地走______________________________________
肮脏与疾病是密切相关的。______________________________________
权和钱密不可分。 _______________________________________
by hand __________
on one hand,on the other hand __________
give/lend sb a hand __________
hand in ___________
hand down ___________
hand out ___________
eg: The custom is handed _____from generation to generation.
2 react
react to 作出反应,反应
react on/upon 影响,起作用
react against 反抗，反对
react with/on 发生化学反应
eg How did she react____ the news?
How did your mother react___ the news? She reacted by getting very angry.
The two react upon each other. 这两者互相影响。
Children tend to react_______ their parents by going against their wishes.
How do acids react on metals?
酸对金属会起怎样的化学反应?
An acid can react ____a base to form a salt.
酸和碱反应会产生盐。
3. annoy
(1). 惹恼,使生气;使烦恼 be annoyed with sb/be annoyed at sth
eg His mother ____him___ being so rude to their neighbors.
A annoyed with;for B annoyed for;for
C was annoyed with;f D was annoyed for ;with
We’re annoyed____ his impolite treatment of his old friends.
他用这种不礼貌的态度对待老朋友,我们都感到气愤。
The sound of footsteps on the bare floor ______the downstairs neighbors. 楼上地板的脚步声吵得楼下住户心烦。
(2) 困扰,打搅
These flies are annoying me. 这些苍蝇一直在打搅我
4 accuse---of 指控,指责
eg She______________________ her watch. 她控告他偷她的表。
He accused his boss of having broken his word. 他指责老板不守信。
He was accused of murder. 有人指控他谋杀
6 by+n/Ving=by means of
Some ads mislead us _____(show)pictures that are only partly true or have been changed better.
7 associate v n___________.
(1.) associate----with 联想,把...联想在一起
They associate turkey with Thanksgiving.他们把火鸡和感恩节联系在一起。
这样一场大雪你有什么联想?____________________________
(2)使联合,使结合[+with]
(3). 使有联系 I didn't want to________________ it at all.我根本 不想与这事有牵连。
(4) 结交,交往[+with]
He___________________________________他与各种各样的人交往。
Never associate with bad companions. 千万不要与坏人为伍
8 get across
(1). 使...被理解,为人理解
I couldn't get my point across in the debate.
在辩论中我无法清楚地表明自己的观点。
He found it difficult to_______________ them.
他发现他难以使他们了解他的想法。
(2) 使信服：使有说服力或可了解：
How can I get across to the students? 我怎样才能让学生心服口服
(3). (使)越过;(使)渡过 I can't get across the river.
9 frequent adj.常见的；频繁的frequency n频率 frequently adv经常地
I enjoyed his________ visits.
我喜欢他经常来访。
Frequent failures did not affect his morale（士气）.
屡次失败都没有使他泄气。
Rains are______ here in early summer. 这儿在初夏季节常下雨。
10 not all/both/every/everything/everyone /everywhere/always----并非
=all--- not/both---not/not---every/---
eg:All the anwers are not right.=___________________________
None of the answers are right.__________________________
It is not always easy to spot a bad ad._____________________
11 be better able to
12 be aware of 熟悉---- 了解------
学生们应该了解认真学习的重要性____________________________
13 figure
(1) 外形;体形;人影
I saw a figure in the darkness.我看到暗处有一个人影。
(2) 体态;风姿 保持身材________________
She has an attractive figure.
她有迷人的曲线。
She has a slender figure.
她身材苗条。
(3) 人物;名人
He has become a figure known to everyone.
他已成了一个知名人物。
(4)数字
Where did you get those figures?
你从哪儿得到那些数字的?
(5)图表;图解;插图
14 distinguish---from
distinguish---bet ween A and B
Translation:
一种高速发展的产业
对广告的反应
作出明智的选择
一方面,另一方面
将产品与消费者的需求联系起来
将信息阐述清楚
投合-------情感
考虑成本
拥有事实和数据的武装
保持体形
手拉手
负责,掌管
留心,注意-------
他因为考试作弊被指责
辨别真伪
让公众了解社会问题和政府政策
认真思考,谨慎思考
Period 5 Word study and Grammar
Teaching aims and demands
(1) Consolidate the words that has been learned
(2) Rerview grammar:the Object Complement
Period 6 Integrating skill
Teaching aims and demands:
(1) To improve the students’ abilities of reading and comprehension
(2) To learn some language points
Step 1 Reading comprehention
(1) How does the language used in ads differ from ordinary languages?
(2) How do companies choose names for their products?
(3) What are the advantages and disadvantages of using a story as an advertisement?
(4) What is strange about the phrases “a free gift” and “an added bonus”
Step 2 Language points
make sense
1 mke sense of
in a sense
eg: The manager has got a good business_____, so the company is doing well.
A idea B sense C thought D thinking
No matter how I tried to read, the sentence ____________________(我还是不懂这个句子)
You are right _________but you don’t know all about the fact.
2 bargain for/on sth 期望;预备
bargain with sb about (over/for) sth 与---讨价还价
It’s a bargain ______________
A bargain price=at a low price
Eg;After much _____,the shop owner agreeed to cut down the price by 2 0%.
A debating B talking C disscussing D bargaining
3 with the purpose of ______________
on purpose ______________
4 partly---and partly----一方面----另一方面
我去那儿既是工作需要,有是为了娱乐
_______________________________________
Exercise
篇14：Unit 2 Integrating skills(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
After discovering the American land, people went on exploring. Read the text on P 158 and find out what the unknown southern land refers to, Australia or Antarctica? ( Antarctica.)
Read more carefully and answer more questions.
1. Who was the first to put the land of Antarctica, as we know now, on the map?
2. What did they think of the land? How did Captain Cook prove that there was no southern continent like that?
3. Did Captain Cook reach Antarctica? Did he discover it? What did he put on the map instead?
1. A Greek map maker.
2. It was surrounded by a ring of fire with a mild climate and wealthy people.He saw icebergs on 10 December, 1772 and for the next two summers, he sailed between iceberg.
3. Yes, he did. No, he didn’t. He put Australia on the map istead.
Now, time goes to the 1920s. By the middle of the 1920s, the farthest corners of the earth had already been explored. That is the seven continents and the four oceans had been mapped. Then what did people explore? Turn to P 16 and have a look at the title. Going high: The Pioneer of the third pole. Can you guess the meaning of going high? (climbing the mountains) So where is the third pole? Mount Qomolangma or Antarctica? (Mount Qomolangma)
Read the text quickly and find out the answer to this question: Who was the first to reach the summit of Mount Qomolangma? When and what nationality were they?
Scanning
Title Going High: the Pioneers of the Third Pole
P1 By the middle of 1920s, Mount Qomolangma remained to be greatest challenge for human beings.
P2 Climbing Mount Qomolangma was dangerous and it seemed almost impossible because of its extreme conditions.
P3 Sherpas prove to be the ideal guide since the first attempt.
P4 Though several attempt failed in 1920s, Edmund Hillary and Tenzing Norgay made their first successful attempt to the summit in 1953.
P5 After the first successful attempt to conquer Mount Qomolangma, it remains man’s great challenges until now.
P6 The Chinese successfully reached the summit of it in 1960.
P7 Over the past 40 years, other 29 Chinese reached the summit for scientific research or sport.
Read the text and answer the following questions.
Why do you think the writer call Mount Qomolangma the third pole?
(First, the North Pole and the South Pole lie respectively in the southernmost and northernmost points of the world, while Mount Qomolangma stands the highest in the world. Second, like the North Pole and the South Pole, it is hard for people to conquer because of the extreme conditions.)
Why can the Tibetans live at ease in such extreme conditions?
Because they have lived there for centuries and have adjusted to the condition.
What makes Sherpas the most reliable guides in every attempt to climb Mount Qomolangma?
Because they are strong, skillful, honest and dedicative.
What might have been the possible reasons that made British expeditions fail in 1922 and 1924?
They were not prepared for many unexpected difficulties and they were not very familiar with Mount Qomolangma.
Why could the two Newzealanders make it to the summit of Mount Qomolangma?
After World War 2, technological advances in clothing and equipment had been made and more was known about the mountain itself.
When did Chinese first reach the summit of Mount Qomolangma? Who were they?
On May 25 of 1960. Gongbu, Wang Fuzhou, and Qu Yinhua.
What evidence does the Chinese team have to prove that they really reached the summit of Mount Qomolangma?
An iron container with the national flag and a portrait of Chairman Mao Zedong.
By now, how many Chinese have climbed Mount Qomolangma successfully, 29, 32 or more than that?
More than 32.
How to understand these sentences and phrases?
Going to Mount Qomolangma was like going to the moon.
Going to Mount Qomolangma was regarded as difficult as going to the moon.
The death Zone
People find it impossible to live in the area.
They had no idea what they were up against.
They didn’t know what conditions they were going to face.
English air
Oxygen brought by the British expeditons.
Like winning in the Olympic Games, climbing a mountain such as Mount Qomolangma is a great personal achievment.
Mountain climbing itself means exploring human possibilities and every success proves the conqueror’s courage, endeavor and ability.
Language points
1. suggest vt.
建议,提议[+v-ing][+(that虚拟)][+n]
I suggested a visit.
I suggest our going to the park on Sunday.
我建议我们星期天去公园。
The dentist suggested that she (should) come another day. 牙医建议她改天再来。
暗示; 启发[+(that陈述)，不能接不定式],
Her expression suggested pleasure./that she was pleased. 她面露喜色。
使人想起,使人联想到[(+to)]
That cloud suggests a boat to me. 那朵云使我联想到船。
2. accomplish vt.
完成,实现,达到
They didn't accomplish the purpose desired. 没有达到预期的目的。
They have accomplished their mission successfully. 他们成功地完成了任务。
走完,度过
She has accomplished 95 years of her life. 她已达九十五高龄。
The journey was accomplished in five weeks. 花了五个礼拜走完全部旅程。
3.apart from 除了，≈besides
Apart from Beijing, they have visited Tianjing,Nanjing,Jinan and Qingdao.
4.adjust to
The foreignners have adjusted to life in Beijing.
5.refer to
查阅，参阅
A person refers to a dictionary to find the meaning of the words.
指……而言，指的是
I knew the lady was referring to Bill when she spoke of a bright young boy.
把……称作(as)
Don’t refer to your sister as a silly cow!
refer…to
指导；让……找
Our teacher refers us to many good books.
If he needs any further information, refer him to me.
归功于；归咎于
He referred his success to the good teaching he’s had.
6. make it be successful in one’s career
He had never made it as a film star but he at last made it as a president.
7.arise (arose, arisen) vi.
升起,上升
A heavy mist arose from the lake. 湖面起了浓雾。
产生,出现,形成[(+from/out of)]
Unexpected difficulties arose in the course of their experiment.
在他们进行实验的过程中,出现了意想不到的困难。
Between the copartners serious disagreements arose.
合伙人之间产生了严重分歧。
8. be praised as =be honored as
The athletes who won medals in the Olympics are praised as national heroes.
最大公因数与最小公倍数的比较 教案教学设计(人教新课标五年级上册)
- 三角形的面积教学设计 (人教新课标五年级上册)2025-07-03
- 高三英语复习教案（SBⅠ-Unit 9-10）(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)2022-12-11
- unit 5 reading and grammar(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)2025-01-12
- 人教新目标八年级上册英语复习要点：第四单元2025-09-03
- 论语概说二(粤教版高三选修) 教案教学设计2023-01-22
- 苏教《史记》选读教案及练习4(高三选修) 教案教学设计2024-10-24
- 人教第九册《黄河是怎样变化的》教学设计2025-06-11
- 高三英语Unit2 Sailing the oceans教案2022-12-11
- 让在质疑中回归让个性在创造中飞扬--我教《人是什么》 (高三上册)2023-01-20
- 第三课时多边形的面积 教案教学设计(人教新课标五年级下册)2025-05-27